Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. 13 Click OK. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. drawing sheets.rte. For most tutorial projects. and plans.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the floor or roof remains connected. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. review the Revit Architecture templates. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. the parameter is one of association or connection. and open Metric\Templates. 2D and 3D view. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. quantities. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. In this case. drawings. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the operation of the software is parametric. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. If the length of the elevation is changed. sections. every drawing sheet. and phases when you need it. click Training Files. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and click Open. schedules. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case. you will use the default template. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and residential. scope. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. If you move the partition. and customize the project as necessary. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and schedules required for a building project. You learn the terminology. 12 Select DefaultMetric. hence. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the hierarchy of elements. In the Revit Architecture model. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. how to navigate the user interface. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. construction. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.

■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. They help to describe or document the model. and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. If you can draw. walls and roofs are hosts. For example. dimensions. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. filled regions. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. tags. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. windows. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. doors. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. dimensions. and cabinets are model components. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. grids. windows. For example. doors.When you change something. levels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. programming is not required. walls. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Examples include detail lines. and keynotes are annotation elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. They display in relevant views of the model. tags.

Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. from geometry to construction data. and types. In other cases. Most often. and drawings of the design. floors. such as roofs. and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. first floor. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Often. top of wall. for example. This information includes components used to design the model. section views. By using a single project file. However. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Project: In Revit Architecture. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. views of the project. for example. you can explicitly control them. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. elevation views. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. families. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. To place levels. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. schedules. and ceilings. or bottom of foundation. The project file contains all information for the building design.In Revit Architecture. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common.

such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. For example. In the steps that follow. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. System families include walls. However. and similar graphical representation. For example. roofs. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. dimensions. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. and levels. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. For example. ceilings. categories of model elements include walls and beams. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. In the following illustration. identical use. the user interface is labeled. A type can also be a style. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Navigating the User Interface | 9 . Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. specifically its clear user interface. floors. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. A type can be a specific size of a family. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects.

new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click (New). In addition. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. This creates a new project based on the default template. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.

The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. and View. which are listed on the menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. While working in the drawing area. For example. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Edit. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Navigating the User Interface | 11 .

a door type is specified. when you add a door. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. When you select the Door tool. On the left side of the Options Bar. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . containing buttons grouped by function.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. select Views (all). Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.11 Click OK. In the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. click the tab in the Design Bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

delete. walls. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. family category (doors. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. reports.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. double-click its name. To open a view. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. families. windows). families. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . schedules. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and groups. elevations. sheets. and group name. 3D). and rename views. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. The browser is dockable.

17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. After creating a browser organization scheme. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the bottom left corner of the window. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. Do not click." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Cancel. click Wall. In this case.

Windows: From any window. You can also press SHIFT+F1. click on the Standard toolbar. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.18 On the Design Bar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. After you are familiar with these tasks. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. In the status bar. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. If no Help button displays. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. press F1 for help. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. 20 Press TAB. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. find a keyword on the Index tab. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. regarding selected elements in a view. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. In addition. Tooltips: To see tooltips. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. You can use this tri-pane. When you place the cursor over an element. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. There are several tools that help you find information. The status bar also provides information. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Click the Help button. press F1 for context-sensitive help. in conjunction with tooltips. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click Training Files.rvt. For example. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the drawing area. There are several ways to access zoom options. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the view zooms out from the building model. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 On the View toolbar.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. In the following steps. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view.

Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. on the View toolbar. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. As you move the mouse. When you release the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . . NOTE As you zoom in and out. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window.

Small blue dots. and select the wall. press ESC. and click Help. as shown. These are the drag controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. When drawing or modifying a building model. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . bottoms. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Similar controls. 15 To exit the wheel. Cnst. and then using the Zoom tool again. For more information about SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. To define settings for SteeringWheels. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 17 Type ZR. moving the wheel to the desired location. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2nd Flr. click Settings menu ➤ Options. expand Views (all). called drag controls. expand Floor Plans.

Some commands. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. click to specify the starting position. to lengthen the wall. After selecting the element to move. 23 Click next to the lower wall. for example. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint.18 Click and drag the left control. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . click (Move). and on the Tools toolbar. The table moves down. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case. as shown. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table.

24 Select the plant. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and click again to end it. or press CTRL+Z. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. and drag it on top of the table. Move.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click Lines. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. select the second item in the list. Some commands. such as the Lines command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 26 On the Undo menu. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click the Undo command. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.

29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify. On the Design Bar.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. When you have finished these tutorials. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. detail. this tutorial uses imperial units only.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. 27 . illustrating how building components work together. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. and annotate building assemblies. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. or referenced as a drafting view. In this tutorial. but for training purposes. Use detail components to define an assembly. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In Revit Architecture. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project.

Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. create a reference callout. import a DWG detail. and click OK. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. scroll until the folder is displayed. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. and reference a drafting view.rvt. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. for Name. enter Window Head Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Scale list. click Training Files. click Drafting View. If necessary. you will create a drafting view.

located directly to the left of the drawing area. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. select Black and White. 9 Type ZR. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The model zooms out. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.). and click Open. as shown. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.dwg. 6 In the Colors field list.In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. The drawing area is still blank. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. displaying the extents of the detail.

select Detail View: Detail. click Callout. and in the Scale list. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to activate the view selection list. in the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The view displays to the specified area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the drawing area. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 13 Click Reference other view.

c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 3 In the drawing area. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. select Detail View: Detail. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly.The reference callout is created. and in the Scale list. 2 On the Options Bar. select Callout. adjust the detail view display settings. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. in the Type Selector. double-click the reference callout tag head. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.

32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Detail Views(Detail). 6 In the drawing area. 5 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify to clear the selection. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. double-click Wall Base 1. 8 On the Design Bar. for Name. enter Wall Base 1. and click OK. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 4 Right-click Detail 0.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser.

bordered by a solid line. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. right-click. select As Underlay. and click View Properties. under Graphics. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. click (Hide Crop Region). 16 Click OK. 14 In the drawing area. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Display Model. 13 On the View Control Bar. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Model-Based Detailing | 35 . Stud. Directly above the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. and press ENTER. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. If the crop region is enlarged.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. click Detail Components. 20 In the drawing area. 19 In the Type Selector. on the Options Bar.Brick on Mtl. By grouping detail components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 17 On the View Control Bar. type 1' 6''. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. typical details can easily be placed. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior .

Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. add the following detail components as shown.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 23 Using the same method. click Modify to end the command. expand Groups ➤ Detail. as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. and click Create Instance. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and Free End are selected. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. For more information about customizing a keynote database. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and format keynote styles. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Leader. or instructions within a construction documentation package. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. 4 On the Options Bar. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. click Training Files. and under Keynote Table. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and verify that Horizontal. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. in the type selector. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. c_express_workshop_details_start. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.rvt. You can customize this list. click Keynote ➤ Element. In the next exercise. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. click Browse. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. map keynotes by material.txt. special notes. for Full Path.

9 Press ESC to end the command. If no value has been specified.5 In the drawing area. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. Keynoting | 39 . 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 7 Click to place the leader arm. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. 8 Click to place the tag. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Either move the text inside. a question mark displays.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. or increase the size of the annotation crop region.

A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 16 In the drawing area. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm. click Keynote ➤ Material.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click to place the tag. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 15 Select 07 21 00. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. and click OK.

All items within the selection display in red. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection.Boxed. Click Check None. legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 19 In the Type Selector. Only the keynotes remain selected. Select Keynote Tags. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.

and modify and update the project sheet title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Place views on drawing sheets. Add labels to a title block. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. In this lesson. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. In this exercise. Update drawing sheet and project information. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. this tutorial uses imperial units only. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you will create a sheet.

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture. If necessary. scroll until the folder is displayed. In the Project Browser. 3 Click OK. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area.rvt. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . click Training Files. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. or in the element properties of the title block. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information.

Then. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. Smith and press ENTER. click Modify to clear the selection. hold down the wheel and drag. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in.4 Type ZR. To zoom in and out. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. you can enter ZE to zoom out. under Sheets(all). enter A602. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Checker. For Name. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. roll the wheel. In this tutorial.Unnamed. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 6 In the Title Block. right-click A602 . enter Sections/Details. 5 In the drawing area. 7 Enter K. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 9 In the Project Browser. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. Click OK. and click Rename. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. To pan. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. Smith. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Options Bar. click Text. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. For Client Name. 20 Click and type Project Status. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter 4/10/2008. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. enter J. (Left) is selected. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. The Family Editor opens. 13 Click OK. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. enter Freighthouse Flats. select the title block.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. in the Type Selector. For Project Name. For Project Status. 16 Type ZR. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. enter Design Development. select Text : 1/8''. 18 On the Options Bar.

46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and click. and verify that (Top) are selected. add Project Issue Date parameter. click Label. as shown. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. select Label : 3/16''. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. click (Load into Project). click Modify to exit the command. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. under Category Parameters.21 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method. in the Type Selector.

to a drawing sheet. In this exercise. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. a viewport displays.30 In the Reload Family dialog. for Name. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. Next you will create. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. and under Keynote Table. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.Project. for Full Path. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . you will create. and click Yes. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. select Override parameter values of existing types.txt. click Browse. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. representing the view or schedule. place and modify a keynote legend. enter Keynote Legend .

under Sheets (all). double-click A601 . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear Show Headers. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. expand Legends. on the Appearance tab. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and drag Keynote Legend . under Text. as shown. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 8 In the Project Browser.Sections/Details.

and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . The keynote legend is visible. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .Project as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.

not keynotes. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. The Keynote Legend is now blank.Project. for View Name. and click Properties. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Filter by sheet. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. at the bottom of the Filter tab. as shown.Sheet. 19 Click OK twice. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and click OK. right-click Keynote Legend . NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. 15 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Detail). click Edit. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. under Legends. for Filter. enter Keynote Legend .

as shown. 2 In the Project Browser. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.Title Sheet 1.The keynote legend is automatically updated. The view remains selected. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. under Sheets (all). expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. double-click A0 . The view title with line displays below the viewport. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area.

You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. Revit Architecture displays a view title. by default.When you place a view on a sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. Press ESC to clear the selection. As part of a construction document set. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. The drawing list remains selected. define the information to include in a view title. as shown. 6 Type ZR. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. You can specify text attributes for view titles. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. or omit view titles from sheets. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 5 In the Project Browser. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. expand Schedules/Quantities. 3 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark.

right-click the selected sheets. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Appears In Drawing List. 8 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. under Sheets (all). The drawing list display is updated. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. while pressing SHIFT. select A602 . and click OK.Sections/Details and select A801 .Ceiling Plans. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . including only sheets that contain views.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

If the grid moves. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. the wall or column will move with it. 57 . Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. a central service core. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. As you develop the building design. a curtain wall. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. After the beginning exercises. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. For example. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development.

Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. views. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and residential. click Training Files. East. The project is stored as a single file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In practice. from the product library. but contains no geometry. you use a template that is provided with the software. In views that display elevation markers. and settings. South. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.rte. The new project opens. you design inside the elevation markers. under Create new. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. 3 Under Template file. verify that the second option is selected. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. click New. and customize the project as necessary. Creating the Project In this exercise. you load any required family type that is not in your project. with an RVT extension. notice four elevation markers.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. For this project. such as a door or window. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. construction. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. under Projects. levels. To create the project file. you will use the default template. locate the Project Browser. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click Browse. In the drawing area in the right pane. West. 5 Click OK.

Groups. enter Revit Retail Building. expand Views (all). Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you will want to save your work frequently. such as schedules and legends. and click Training Files. and elevation views created in the project by the template. Schedules/Quantities. duplicate them. and on the General tab. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). change their properties. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Sheets (all). the view you see in the drawing area. heights. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Families. 16 Click Save. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. and delete them. then expand Floor Plans.rvt) is selected. As you design and document your building model. 8 Under Floor Plans. NOTE If you create a project without a template. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. created by the template.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. and Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. 7 If necessary. sheets. reflected ceiling plan views. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). view the Save reminder interval. Creating the Project | 59 . display in the south elevation. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. and families in your project. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. 14 For File name. Two level lines. and duplicate levels. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. delete. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 13 In the file window.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. will be accessible from the Project Browser. as well as change their names. verify that Project Files (*. You can add. 15 For Save as type. schedules. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. content and building model reports. These views are customizable: you can rename them. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. double-click Metric. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. Ceiling Plans. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and other properties. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. 10 In the Project Browser. notice the Legends.

and press ENTER. doors. enter 00 Foundation. the other levels move and change with it. When you begin designing. to each other. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. After you modify the two default levels. Adding Project Levels on page 60. and windows within the building model. and double-click South. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. or constrained. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. so that when one level moves. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building.17 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. You change the names of the 2 default levels. You learn how the levels are locked. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. expand Views (all). 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. If it does not. and press ESC. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. view the Design Bar. Adding Project Levels | 61 .4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. By default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and press ENTER. enter 01 Entry Level. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. enter 0. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. and then move it up. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 16 Enter 3750. 14 Click Plan View Types. and press ENTER. and click OK. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. which should display by default. When you add the new level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. and press ENTER. click Level. right-click. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. not all the tabs are visible. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. This is the Options Bar. enter -1800.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. As you move the cursor. 5 In the Project Browser. and click Basics. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text.

add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. Next. and move it slightly upward. click Rename. enter 3750. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. right-click Level 3. 23 On the Options Bar. using a different option. 26 Press ESC. and rename the corresponding views. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 25 Click to place the level line. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. and enter 02 Level. under Floor Plans. If you create a level by copying it. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click (Pick Lines). verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click Modify to end the command. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. you add another level. or on the Design Bar. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar.18 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK.

If you select a level and click its lock. Adding Project Levels | 63 . the levels are no longer constrained. all the levels move.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Notice that by moving the top level. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. as shown. and you can move them independently. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.

In a later exercise. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. select (Draw). specify a start point for the grid line. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. so that if the roof elevation changes. Move the cursor up. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. In the following exercise. On the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Grid.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. and specify the grid line endpoint. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. the column height changes as well. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. click Modify. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. When the grid is complete.

On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click (Pick Lines). On the Options Bar. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and press ENTER. and for Offset. enter 4500 mm. and click to place the line. Next. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Enter A. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. click Grid. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 7500 mm. Click to place the grid line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line.

8 Press ESC. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. On the Options Bar. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid.

click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . click Dimension. 14 On the Options Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select grid lines C and 3. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click (Aligned). click Dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 15 Starting with grid line A. 22 While pressing CTRL. 21 Press ESC twice. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 18 On the Design Bar.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar.

You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Edit/New. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and click OK.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. The pins are hidden. click Modify. click and drag the blue circular grip up. Two pins display on the grid lines. until it is closer to grid line A. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Duplicate. By pinning these central grid lines. At the left endpoint of the grid line. until it is closer to grid line 5. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display.5mm Bubble with Gap. If necessary. select grid line 5. click . 33 On the Design Bar. 31 For End Segments Length. 26 In the drawing area. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and press ESC. (Element Properties). 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 24 Press ESC. and press ESC. enter 50mm. click the value for Center Segment. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. enter 6. and select None. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and select grid line A. 29 In the Name dialog. 32 Click OK twice. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. ■ ■ Select grid line 1.

39 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select Grid : 6. and press ESC. For Place By. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 36 On the Design Bar. click (Grid Intersection). Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select all of the grid lines. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. click Structural Column. and in the Type Selector.5mm Bubble. 35 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 37 Select the grid lines again. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Finish. The original continuous grid lines are restored.

select 01 Entry Level. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. If it is unlocked. for From. Next.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . lock it. click Activate Dimensions. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. and unlock it. 46 On the Options Bar. 43 Press ESC. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 Enter 9000. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 45 While pressing CTRL. click Camera. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 52 On the Options Bar. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. select grid line A.

and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

and click Rename. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. enter To Building. Adding Beams on page 72. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Adding Beams In this exercise. under Views (all). displays in bold under 3D Views. In the Rename View dialog. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand 3D Views. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. When you finish adding beams. named 3D View 1 by default.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. Right-click 3D View 1.

view the icons on the View Control Bar.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. the icon on the right side of the scale. The view is currently set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Type Selector. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. select each grid line. The selected grid lines display as red. 4 Click Medium. click (Create Beam On Grid). double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 7 On the Options Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. click Finish. click Beam. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 While pressing CTRL. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. Adding Beams | 73 . 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. press and hold SHIFT. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. select 06 Roof. click Modify. 12 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. right-click. and click OK. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. 14 Select one of the beams.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. select 02 Level. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building.

for Top Level. and if necessary. select 06 Roof. view the Top Level parameter. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 20 Click Cancel. and click Select All Instances. under Instance Parameters. When you created the columns. 22 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. right-click. 06 Roof.to the 5th level. All of the columns display as red. under 3D Views. right-click. double-click To Building. Adding Beams | 75 . you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and click Element Properties. click 24 Press ESC. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 25 In the Project Browser. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. resize the view to see the entire structure. (Element Properties). 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 21 With the column selected.

The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. under Elevations. but you want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. as lines only. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

To better add the braces to the structure. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces on page 77. 3 On the Options Bar. click Framing Elevation. double-click 00 Foundation. and press ESC to end the command. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces | 77 . verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.29 Proceed to the next exercise.

You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click to specify the start point of the brace.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. press ESC twice. 11 Using the same technique. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. but when placed the braces are placed. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. and when the endpoint snap displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 8 In the Type Selector. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. After you add the final brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). click Brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 7 On the Design Bar. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B.

enter 18000 mm. delete it and redraw it.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 79 . and press ENTER. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.

under Floor Plans. but this time add them from right to left. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER.

and press ENTER. 23 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 81 . 21 Select grid line A. and on the Options Bar. enter 12000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 19 In the Project Browser. as shown in the 3D view below. NOTE As you add braces. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). click Activate Dimensions.

beams. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. double-click {3D}. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. under Elevations. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 26 In the Project Browser.24 In the Project Browser. and drag it away from the structure. under 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. lock it. click and roof height. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. and if necessary. Creating a Foundation on page 82. grid size. 29 In the Project Browser. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. Test connectivity of the columns. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 31 Save the drawing. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. under Floor Plans.

3 In the Revit dialog that displays. click Foundation ➤ Isolated.Before you can add the pile caps. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the View Range dialog. double-click 00 Foundation. In the Element Properties dialog. A warning displays. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and press ESC twice. and drag it to the drawing area. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. expand Families. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Unlimited. 9 Close the warning dialog. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. The foundation pile cap now displays. and click View Properties. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). for View Range. After you load the pile cap family. Creating a Foundation | 83 . you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. Click OK twice. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid.rfa. and expand Structural Foundations. for Level. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and how to load specific families into a project. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. under View Depth. The pile cap has been added in the view. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. under Extents. click Edit. click Training Files.

press ESC twice.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Create Similar. When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser.

and brace families into the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click {3D}. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you change the types of the columns. 2 Select one of the columns. All columns in the building model display as red. You load new column. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise.rvt. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. click Training Files. beam. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . It is not available in a perspective or camera view. beams. under 3D Views. right-click. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available.

15 In the Project Browser. but it is the only size of its type currently available. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. the braces as well as the beams change. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). right-click. 17 While pressing CTRL. double-click Elevation 1-a. click Edit/New. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 7 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. click (Element Properties). and click Select All Instances. you change the brace type. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .3 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type.2X101. click Modify.6X15. select M_Round Bar : 25mm.9. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. The building model displays the round hollow columns. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View). select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. and changing its size parameter. 13 In the Name dialog. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. This not the size that you want to use. In the following steps. under Dimensions. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. enter 75mm. enter 75mm. The brace type changes. for d. click Brace. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203.5CHS. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify.

select m_RRB_structure_complete. After the files are linked. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. and click Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. click Training Files. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Auto . Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. 3 Under Positioning. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. click Copy. In this case. select Multiple. however. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. Grids. select the linked Revit model. and click Select Link. 9 In the drawing area. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 8 On the Options Bar. and walls could also be copy/monitored. under Elevations. 5 On the Tools toolbar. After the link is established. double-click South. 6 In the drawing area. click (Copy/Monitor). select Levels 00 through 06. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model.4 In the Project Browser. while pressing CTRL. structural members. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. depending on the project. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

15 In the New Plan dialog. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . while pressing SHIFT. 13 On the Design Bar. delete the Level 2 floor plan. First. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 16 Click OK. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. 18 Using the same method. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. click Finish. for Floor Plan views.10 On the Options Bar. and click Delete. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. click OK. right-click Level 1. click Finish mode.

under Floor Plans. right-click. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 24 In the New View Template dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area. for Name. 25 In the View Templates dialog. select the Topography : Surface. double-click 01 Entry Level.19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Floor Plans. right-click. click OK. and click OK. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation.

32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. under Names. double-click Site. click Camera. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. Linking the Structural Model | 91 .Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plans.

36 In the Rename View dialog. expand 3D Views. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and click OK.35 In the Project Browser. To create floors. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Floors In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and click Rename. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. and railings are also created from sketches. stairs. enter To Building. Adding Floors on page 92. click Training Files. right-click 3D View 1. Some other Revit Architecture elements. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. such as roofs.

■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension. click Lines. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor to the left. At the top left corner of the grid. If the grid changes size. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Adding Floors | 93 . 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. On the Sketch tab. select the top floor line. and elements in the current view display as gray. On the Options Bar. past the first vertical grid line. under Floor Plans. click Dimension. click (Rectangle). Leave this dimension unlocked. and then the first horizontal grid line. click Floor. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it.

click Finish Sketch to create the floor. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. select the top floor line. and click the temporary dimension value. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to the left dimension. They display on the floor sketch. Select and lock the dimensions. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . At the top left corner of the grid. and then press ESC. Do not lock the dimensions. click Modify. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. press ENTER. Enter 300.

■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors | 95 . You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and press ESC. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. Next. enter 1500mm. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click Floor. On the Sketch tab. using a different sketching technique. click Quit Sketch. on the Design Bar. click Lines. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. double-click 02 Level. Select the three remaining floor lines. and lock the dimensions. click Edit.8 Select the floor. and for Offset. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). and on the Options Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser.

20 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Floor. click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. and a lock icon displays. 16 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click (Align). 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click (Rectangle). 17 On the Sketch tab. The 02 Level floor displays. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 On the Design Bar. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.

29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. under Floor Plans. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 35 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch.24 On the Design Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Project Browser. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Edit. and lock the edges. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. click Finish Sketch. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. double-click 01 Entry Level. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. double-click {3D}. Adding Floors | 97 . dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 32 Select the floor. and click OK. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. Alternatively. select 05 Roof Garden.

click to place the roof line. ■ ■ For Offset. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. To create the roof. under Floor Plans. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. double-click 06 Roof. Click (Pick Lines). You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. When a blue dashed line displays. 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 1800 mm. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof In this exercise. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. Adding a Roof on page 98. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and when the blue dashed line displays. for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line.6 Select grid line 5. enter 300 mm. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 99 . 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). click to place the roof line.

click Finish Roof. select the roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).10 Press ESC.

click Modify. move the cursor down below the roof. click Section.14 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and click to specify the section. 17 On the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 15 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter -100 mm. for Elevation. Adding a Roof | 101 . The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. on grid D.

25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.20 On the Design Bar. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select the roof. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click 06 Roof. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. (Element Properties). 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. select Variable. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit. 30 Click OK 3 times. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. for Structure [1]. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. for Structure. and on the Options Bar. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). In section. under Construction. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Fascia : Fascia . select the section line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. moving counter-clockwise. on the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. click Modify. select each edge. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 38 In the 3D view. 40 In the Type Selector.31 On the Design Bar. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. and press DELETE.Roof Edge. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. zoom in to the roof. Adding a Roof | 103 . 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 37 If necessary. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. In this case. 33 In the warning dialog. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes.

the curtain wall resizes with it. double-click To Building. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. click Modify. so if you resize the grid. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .42 On the Design Bar. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click Training Files. click Duplicate. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK twice. Under Construction. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. click 01 Entry Level. enter 2100 mm. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. For Level.rvt. enter 600 mm. and click OK. For Height. enter 1050 mm. under Floor Plans. For Offset. click to place the first curtain wall segment. The type is saved in the project. enter Retail Storefront. click Wall. select 05 Roof Garden. for Type. 6 In the Name dialog. select 01 Entry Level. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. for Join Condition. click Edit/New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). When you duplicate a type. for Spacing. for Spacing. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Vertical Grid Pattern.

15 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so they remain in the view. click (Trim/Extend). 13 On the Design Bar. you can delete the dimensions. If you want to hide them. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the dimensions. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. These dimensions are not in a sketch. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. and trim each curtain wall segment. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. If the grid moves.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. click Dimension.

rvt.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating an Entrance on page 107. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 . you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.

To better work with the curtain wall panels. click All. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. All the elements in the list are selected. 2 On the View Control Bar. as these usually represent internal pilasters. under the element list. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 4 On the Model Categories tab. clear one element to clear all the elements. 6 Under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). and double-click South. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Click OK. and click None. 5 Under Visibility. Do not select Columns.

you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. press and hold CTRL. select System Panel : Solid. double-click {3D}. 16 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View Control Bar.9 On the Design Bar. 12 With the panels selected. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. in this case an architectural elevation. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. and click OK. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. in the Type Selector. 17 In the Project Browser. select Architectural Elevation. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 10 Select 1 panel. click Modify. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. Creating an Entrance | 109 .

under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 20 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .19 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under 3D Views. double-click To Building.

select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 24 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 32 In the Type Selector. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments. and unpin it. select One Segment. 27 On the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and click to select it. select another mullion to the right. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). click Modify. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select it. press TAB until it is selected. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. click (Default 3D View). 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and view the new entrance. and unpin it. 36 Zoom in to the first panel.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 34 On the View toolbar. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.

and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 40 Optionally. 3rd. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and 4th panels. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 39 Using the same process. open the North elevation.38 Press DELETE. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .

double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. select 02 Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. for Underlay. and click View Properties. under Graphics. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Right-click in the view. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. under Floor Plans.

10 In the Rename View dialog. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and click Rename. select the grip closest to the callout head. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Display Area. and click to complete the callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click OK. 8 Select the callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . The cursor changes to a pencil. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. under Floor Plans.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout.

Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 14 Press ESC. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 12 Draw a section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 Select the section line. right-click. 16 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. and click Flip Section.

■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. right-click Section 1. Lock both alignments. For Loc Line. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. Click (Rectangle). select Wall faces. 27 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Finish Face: Exterior. and click Rename. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click Wall. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. expand Sections (Building Section). 25 Press ESC twice. under Floor Plans. click (Align).135mm Partition (2-hr). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Section Display Area. 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Basic Wall : Interior . and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines.17 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. for Prefer. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

click Ceiling.) 36 Press ESC twice. Next.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. and lock the dimension. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. under Sections (Building Section). 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. double-click 01 Entry Level. 38 On the View Control Bar. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

46 Press ESC. 47 In the Project Browser. 43 On the Design Bar. click Modify. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. click (Element Properties). for Height Offset From Level. for Base Offset. press TAB until you select the wall chain. On the Options Bar. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. under Constraints. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. and click (Element Properties). 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. and click to select the walls. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. enter 2700 mm. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. double-click 01 Entry Level.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC. under Sections. click to select it. and click to select the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Select the 02 Level Floor. double-click Section Display Area. under Ceiling Plans.

for Structure. click Edit/New. click Edit. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Cancel.49 In the Project Browser. click (Rotate). 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Cancel. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 54 Click OK. under Construction. under Ceiling Plans. and click . view the ceiling structure. for Type. 52 In the Type Properties dialog.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .60 Click. enter 45. 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.

View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows Off. 64 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 66 Optionally. 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. click Shadows On.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. click Training Files. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and copy it to the 05 Level. click Ref Plane.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level. and for Offset. Move the cursor over grid line B. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1500 mm. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and click to create a reference plane to the right. and click to create a reference plane to the left. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.

7 Using the same method. and 3. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5 On the Design Bar. 2. click Modify. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. shorten the right reference plane. 6 Select the left reference plane. and specify a point to create first stair flight. click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.

10 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . select Finish Face: Interior. The complete stair displays. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . Click (Rectangle). click Wall. and specify a point. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. beyond the end of the stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. 12 In the Type Selector. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.225mm Masonry. Move the cursor down. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. including its handrails. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.

press TAB until the stair edge is selected. and click to select it. select Wall faces. Lock the dimension. Click Modify. 18 Using the same technique. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. for Prefer. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and specify a point away from the wall. and press ENTER. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Select the wall. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. Select the interior face of the wall. click Dimension. and lock the alignment. enter 1200 mm. click Align. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. select the dimension value. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall.

and press DELETE. and press DELETE. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo). 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm.21 Select the dimension. select both reference planes. The stair and walls move to the left. 27 In the Type Selector. TIP To flip the door swing. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. a warning displays. 25 While pressing CTRL. 28 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . Because the dimension is constrained. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. click Door. 23 Select the stair. clear Tag on Placement.

but if you view the top level of the building. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for Multistory Top Level. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. select all 4 walls. select 00 Foundation. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. under Floor Plans. (Element Properties). 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 44 On the Tools toolbar. (Default 3D View). 35 On the View toolbar. click Align. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). Click OK. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. Under Constraints. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. (Rectangle). Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. for Base Constraint. click Modify. Click OK. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. click 36 On the View toolbar. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). 33 Select the stair. For Top Constraint. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs.30 On the Design Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. double-click 01 Entry Level. and move the cursor to spin the building model.

46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . and lock the alignments. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. (SteeringWheels). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 52 In the Select Levels dialog. on the View toolbar. click see the roof. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and click OK. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the alignment. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair.

(SteeringWheels). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. enter 300 mm. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. By offsetting the base. for Base Offset. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. under Floor Plans. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 56 Select the shaft. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties).55 In the Project Browser. For Top Constraint. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Under Constraints. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. (Default 3D View). click 59 On the View toolbar. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and click View Properties. click Wall. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 06 Roof. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. and click OK. for Underlay. 2 Right-click in the view.

13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit Profile. and then select the right face of the wall. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines.225mm Masonry. 16 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall : Generic . and click Open View. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. and click (Fillet arc). Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog. click Lines. and press ENTER. enter 9750. select Elevation: South. The exact placement is not important. click . click Remove Constraints. click (Align). 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 15 In the error dialog. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

double-click {3D}. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. under 3D Views. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. 22 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and click (Circle). as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.

Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 3 In the Type Selector.4. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Component. TIP After you place the 1st planter. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 5 On the Basics tab. and press ESC twice. select M_RPC Tree . Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Component. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. between grid lines C and D. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 6 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.5 Meters. under Floor Plans.rvt.

20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New.8 On the View toolbar.5 Meters. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. (Element Properties). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click Lines. View the roof. and click OK. 17 While pressing CTRL. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. enter 2400 mm. For Offset. and in the Type Selector. enter Japanese Cherry 1. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 21 On the Design Bar.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. select M_RPC Tree . click Duplicate. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Floor.5 Meters. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 14 In the Name dialog. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. enter 1500 mm. as shown. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. select the 2 remaining trees. for Type. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and then click OK twice. 16 Click Apply. for Height. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. under Dimensions. 11 Select one of the trees. click (Default 3D View).

for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 25 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . and click to place the line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm. click (Draw).

move the cursor up 900 mm. and click to finish the line. click (Trim/Extend). 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 35 Select the line that you just drew. clear Chain. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to finish the line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B.

a photorealistic image displays. and click so he is facing the column. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 39 Select the sidewalk. 43 Click OK twice. In plan view. 48 In the Type Selector. for Type. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. When you render an image. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. and on the Options Bar. select M_RPC Male : Alex. as shown: (Element Properties). 45 Click OK. enter -250 mm. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. click Edit/New. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Name dialog. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. click Duplicate. click Component.38 On the Design Bar. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. for Height Offset from Level. Next. near Column E5. The completed sidewalk displays.

56 Press ESC twice. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. select M_RPC Beetle. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. about 30 degrees. 54 In the Type Selector. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If necessary. and click (Element Properties). 52 In the Type Selector. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click to place her on the sidewalk. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. click the car.

enter -300 mm. 66 Using the same method. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. click Pick Host. 65 Click the sidewalk. 63 Click the sidewalk. 64 Select Alex. Next. double-click West. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components.59 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and click OK. under Elevations. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. and on the Options Bar. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. If the sidewalk changes height. 60 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. When you select a host for a component. for Offset. click Pick Host.

and replace them with a service core. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

walls. including the stairs. you delete the entire stairwell. and shaft opening. under Floor Plans. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. (SteeringWheels). click Training Files.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. 5 On the View toolbar. 4 Press DELETE. click (Default 3D View). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . click 6 On the View toolbar.

10 In the Project Browser. click (Align). and on the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level.rvt. under Floor Plans. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. under Floor Plans. and click Create Instance. expand Groups. click OK. and notice that the linked file is listed. 11 In the Project Browser. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. expand Model. and zoom in to the linked instance.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Training Files. double-click 00 Foundation. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 13 In the drawing area. right-click m_RRB_core. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser.

(SteeringWheels). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and on the Options Bar. and click to align the center. or if the group layout is expected to change. click (top down view). 19 On the Design Bar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Modify. 20 On the View toolbar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. ■ ■ Click grid line C. click Modify. (Default 3D View). click Ungroup. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 18 Select the core. click 21 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms.

where it is hosted within a railing family.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. you add glass railings around the floor edges.rvt. After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.

and click to split the floor. Handrail only. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and Parapet. and expand Railings. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . expand Renderings. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. The rendering displays. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and select Glass. click Training Files. 8 In the Project Browser. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. expand Families.rvt. click OK. The floor sketch displays. press and hold CTRL. 13 On the Tools toolbar. in the Project Browser.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Expand Railing. click (Split). 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. double-click 02 Level. 3 In the Conference project. click Edit. Notice the glass railing in the foreground.rvt. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and open Metric\m_Conference. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C.

24 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Modify. verify that Chain is not selected. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and on the Options Bar. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and click to place it. click (Align). 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select grid line B. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click Lines. and click to draw another line.15 On the Design Bar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and click to draw another line.

This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 33 On the Design Bar. for Type. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Finish Sketch. enter 100 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. and click OK. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Railing. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 .26 Select grid line D. click (Align). select Glass. Lock the dimensions. click Railing Properties.rvt project.

38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. click Camera. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .37 On the Design Bar. 39 Click Finish Sketch. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

NOTE For training purposes. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. 153 . balconies.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. lofty ceilings. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. and a roof garden. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.

154 .

elevation. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. 155 . section. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. how to create section and elevation views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. expand Floor Plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Level 2. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser.

158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Vicinity Plan. double-click Vicinity Plan. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Next. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 .

select 1:100. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. click Elevation. under Floor Plans.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.

select 1:100. 10 In the Rename View dialog. for Scale. and double-click Level 1. ■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. select Section: Building Section. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. click Section. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and click OK. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans. under Elevations. enter South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. using the blue circular drag grip. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section).

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Scale. select Floor Plan. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 .rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. select 1:50. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Resulting callout view .

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

select 1:50. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 169 . under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 1. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. for Scale. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select Detail View: Detail. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click OK. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. under Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 .17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. the elevation markers.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.rvt. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. select Custom-Section Head. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rfa. double-click Level 1. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. and click Open.

and click OK. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK twice. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. clear any others. Section Tail . scroll to Section Marks. and select 2. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. 12 For Section Tag. 19 Click OK.Custom. 10 On the floor plan. 22 In the Name dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. scroll to Section Line. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. 15 Under Category.Filled.5mm Square. click Duplicate. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click Duplicate. and select 3. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail – Filled. 4 On the Design Bar. enter 12. On the floor plan.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . and click OK. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. select the section line. select the current project. and click OK. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 17 Under Category. . for Section Head. and can be applied to the section line. click Edit/New. select Section Head . 8 In the Name dialog.

open Metric\Families\Annotations. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select Square. select the current project.23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag.5mm Square. enter 6 mm. For Corner Radius. select Custom-Callout Head. 36 In the drawing. select the callout. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. and click OK. . 39 Click OK twice. and click Open. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click Load into Project. and on the Options Bar. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. . 27 Click OK twice. Click OK. click Duplicate. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. enter 12. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. notice the square elevation markers that display. clear all others. and on the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 40 Press ESC. For Line Weight. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select 3. for Callout Tag.rfa.5 mm. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. On the floor plan. Click OK. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 12. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. For Dimensions ➤ Width.

The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. masking regions. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 43 Under Category. select Dash. You learn to create view templates. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and visual overrides. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 46 Under Category. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary. 45 For Line Pattern. click the Annotation Objects tab. view regions.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select 4. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 49 Click OK. filters.

2 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 5 On the View Control Bar. The crop region displays as red. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and apply it to multiple elevation views. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. To accomplish this.rvt. click (Show Crop Region). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Zoom to Fit.Creating a View Template In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the View Toolbar. click (Hide Crop Region). Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. click Training Files. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

clear Entourage. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. levels. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. elevation markers. and section lines are now hidden in the view.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. Creating a View Template | 177 . Callouts. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 11 Under Visibility. grids. 13 On the View Control bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

under Elevations. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. edit the crop region as before. and click Create View Template From View. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Apply View Template.14 In the Project Browser. right-click North. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 16 In the View Templates dialog. click Apply. 20 Using the same method. double-click North.rvt. right-click East. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click OK. 15 In the New View Template dialog. under Elevations.

right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Edit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Click OK twice. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . under Extents. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Properties. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. for Level. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. select Level Below (Level 4). You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. for Bottom. double-click Penthouse. select Level Below (Level 4). 2 In the Project Browser. for View Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Under View Depth.

for Bottom. for Level. right-click. and click Properties. for View Range.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. select Level 4. Under View Depth. select Roof Plan. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

for View Range. 16 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . Under View Depth. under Extents. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Lines. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Edit. select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Click OK twice. Move you cursor diagonally. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. select Unlimited. 10 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region. for Bottom. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Finish Sketch. In the left corner of the building. for Level.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After you apply the filter.17 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Modify. in this case. the fire rating of the walls. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. and double-click Level 1. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click the Filters tab. under Views (all).

9 Click OK. select Solid Fill. under Categories. click <No Override>. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Enter Hr. select Fire Rating. 11 Select Rated Walls. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Edit/New. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. and click OK.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Walls. under Filters. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. under Basic colors. 10 On the Filter tab. enter Rated Walls. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 16 Click OK. for Color. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. for Rated Walls. for Pattern. under Projection/Surface. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. select the red color. click OK. and apply a color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click Add. 12 On the Filter tab. click Remove. click (New). 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. click Override under Patterns. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Select contains.

you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click Rename.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 5 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. as shown. 8 Select the crop region. click Masking Region. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. select Invisible lines. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 9 On the View Control Bar.

12 On the Options Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.

and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click black.rvt. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. for Pattern. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 11 Click OK twice. right-click. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Pattern Overrides. for Color. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Level 1. click in the Patterns field. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override. right-click. select Walls. 7 Under Cut. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. under Visibility. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Solid fill. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . and click OK. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click 1: 50. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 1 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. 4 On the View Control Bar. click <No Override> to apply a color. under Floor Plans. right-click Unit 18 Plan .

and click OK. clear Grids. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Floors. click Modify. under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 16 Under Visibility.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

select Dash. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 23 In the Color dialog. 25 Click OK twice. select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for Pattern. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Projection Lines. click a purple color. right-click.20 Right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 21 Under Projection/Surface. under Lines. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. for Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

and click OK twice. click By Category Override. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. right-click.28 For Color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 32 Select one of the lamps. 29 In the Color dialog. select a bright green color. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click .

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets.33 On the View Control Bar.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. right-click. select A0 metric.rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . click Sheet. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.Creating Sheets. and click View. click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.

expand Sheets (all). and select the title block. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. enter Site Plan. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Sheet Number. on the Options Bar. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 5 When the title block highlights.Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Name. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify. enter A101.

MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter For Approval. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter 2009-1. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Project Number. enter 15 May. 14 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. 2009. click Edit. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. Smith. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Name. For Project Status. enter J. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other.

and click Rename. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter Floor Plan. you add views to these sheets.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. right-click. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK.Layout Plan A104 . select A0 metric.Elevations A106 . 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A107 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Save. for Name. select the new sheet name. and click OK.Sections A108 .rvt. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A105 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Stairs In the following exercise.

and click to place the view.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Elevations.Floor Plan. double-click A104 . under Sheets (all). The red border around the view no longer displays. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 .rvt. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A107 .Sections. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . align it with the East elevation. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. under Sheets (all). 8 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail).

Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and on the Options Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select 1:5. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. move the cursor over it. 16 Select title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and click OK. and press TAB until it highlights. for View Scale. zoom in to the grip. .

23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). double-click A108 . click Modify. 18 Under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and click to place it. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

you must first activate the view on the sheet. In order to do this. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter 16700 mm. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 .Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and click Activate View. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.Sections.rvt. right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 2 Select the building section view. and press ENTER. double-click A107 . 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.6 Right-click. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. under Elevations (Building Elevation). You modify the view to hide the view title. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Deactivate View. After you create the sheet.rvt.

The camera view displays. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. enter Title Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. click Camera. and click Properties. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Click OK. select the new sheet name. select A0 metric. right-click. For Sheet Name. enter T. 3 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

enter 1500 mm. under Sheets (all). Under Camera. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 11 On the View Control Bar.8 On the Options Bar. For Far Clip Offset. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click T . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 100000 mm. for Eye Elevation. For Target Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. select Far Clip Active. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Extents. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.Title Sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Click OK.

17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. for Height. click Modify. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . enter Viewport/no title mark.15 With the view selected. 25 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. select No. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter 635 mm. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Click OK twice. select Scale (locked proportions). click Duplicate. . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and then click OK. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Size. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Click Apply. Under Model Crop Size. for Show title.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as room and window schedules. click Training Files. Because of the open style floor plan. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.rvt. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as doors and windows. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Level 1. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 207 . You also learn to create different types of schedules. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Tagging Objects In this lesson. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.

as shown: 5 Using the same method. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. move the cursor to the right. click Room Separation.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click Room and Area. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. right-click in the Design Bar.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog.6 Using the same method. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Load. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

click it. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. click OK. type U18-1. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. verify that Tag on placement is selected.rfa. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 2400 mm. click Training Files. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 14 For Offset. 11 In the Tags dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and press ENTER. click Modify. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and select the room tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. and the rectangle contains the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. and click to place the room and tag.

place rooms and tags. and press ENTER. click Modify. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. type Kitchen. type Entry. Sequential letters are also supported. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and press ENTER. Dining. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar.18 Click the room text label. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. click Room. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. Click to place the new room and tag. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2.

The rooms are already placed. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Room Tag. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Floor Plans. and moving clockwise. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. on the Model Categories tab. expand Lines. 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . but they need to be tagged.Level 2. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. clear Room Separation. click Modify.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).

clear Leader. expand Floor Plans.Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. you learn how to place door and window tags. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . click Tag ➤ By Category.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 101-106. type Building Entry. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 10 Edit the number to be 101. The room Number is U17-46. type Corridor. type Storage. For 102. For 105. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. for room 101. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. For 104. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. select Storage. click New. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. select Corridor. for Name. For 103.

Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Room Separation. click the Color field.■ For 106. and press ENTER. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Lines field. under Visibility. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. you add room separation lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and modify room names. 4 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1. In the Line Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Weight. select 9. type Stair. expand Lines. 13 Save the file. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Override. click the Lines field.rvt. place rooms from a program list. click the bright green swatch. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Projection/Surface. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Custom colors.

6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Room Separation. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Room.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 9 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line.

234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. type 2400 mm.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 14 For Offset. for Room. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.

Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 19 In the Project Browser. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 20 While pressing CTRL. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Floor Plans. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. place the following rooms. 17 On the Design Bar.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. and zoom in to the Corridor. click Modify. 16 Using the same method. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas.

24 Open the Room Schedule. under Category. click Modify. clear Room Bounding. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. (Element Properties). under Available fields. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 For Key Name. 27 Select Schedule keys. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click New. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. for Rows. and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. type Units. select Base Finish. Floor Finish. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK.21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and Wall Finish. under Constraints. select Rooms. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and for all 3 finishes. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type As Selected. 26 In the New Schedule dialog.

for Fields. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. right-click Room Schedule. 44 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. under Identity Data. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Style.32 Using the same method. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). for Room Style. 33 In the Project Browser. 42 On the Options Bar. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. select Units. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 1. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Filter dialog. 37 Open the Room Schedule. click (Element Properties). under Schedules/Quantities. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click OK. and click OK. click Check None. and click Add. for Available fields. under Other. select Units. 38 Under U17-8. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 36 Click OK twice. click Edit. select Rooms.

right-click Level 1.rvt. type Room Type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Public. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and apply it to the Level 1 view. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. (Duplicate). 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. and click OK.46 Open the Room Schedule. 103. click OK. select Room Style. click 5 For Title. For rooms 102 and 105. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. at the warning prompt. and click Properties. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and double-click Level 1. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Name. under Views (all). Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Service. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 48 Save the file. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Color. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. and 106. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. click the Color Scheme field. type Room Type. 104. 4 In the New color scheme dialog.

12 In the Element Properties dialog. select the color legend. click Edit Color Scheme. under Visibility. and click OK. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 17 On the Design Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Schemes. expand Lines. select Room Type. click Edit. click the value in the Color column. and clear Room Separation. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . clear Visible. click Color Scheme Legend. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 14 Click OK twice. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

click Modify. click Edit/New. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. respectively. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. for Size. 23 Using the same method. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. select blue. under Custom color. on the Options Bar. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice.22 In the Color dialog. under Graphics. type 25 mm. 28 Under Title Text. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. type 5 mm. 24 Click OK. (Element Properties).

NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. select Room Type. under Sections. and select Properties. right-click Building Section. double-click Building Section. under Visibility. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Edit. click Color Scheme Legend. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. for Color Scheme. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Sections. 35 Click OK twice. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Graphics. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. and click OK. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . select Rooms. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. select Public. for Room Style. select all the rooms in the stairwell. under Identity Data. click . 41 On the Options Bar. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 42 In the Filter dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and click OK. 46 Click . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. click Check None. and click OK. under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. (Filter Selection). for Room Style. select Rooms.

Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. for Rows. 51 On the Options Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . 49 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . excluding the stairwell spaces. for Room Style. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. under Schedules/Quantities. type Suites. 54 While pressing CTRL.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. under Key Name for the new row. double-click Room Style Schedule. select Service. and click OK. click New. under Identity Data.

56 In the Element Properties dialog. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. The color fill will extend to the roof.55 Click . 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. select Areas and Volumes. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. under Identity Data. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 59 Under Room Area Computation. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select the room on the left side of the top floor. select Suites. under Volume Computations. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. The color fill extends to the roof. but not beyond it. for Room Style. verify that At wall finish is selected. and click OK.

under Constraints. under Constraints.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. and the living room. the dining room. and click 65 For Limit Offset. click Modify. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select the stairwell room. 66 Click OK. type -254 mm. 72 On the Design Bar. 67 On the first level. . type 0. 70 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. select Loft. 68 Click . 71 Click OK.0. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). select Level 2.

Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.73 Save the file. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.

Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . 9 Using the same method. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .Insulation on Plywood Deck .2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Family and Type. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Roofs.EPDM. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. click Family and Type. Select Grand totals. and click Add. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Description. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Available fields. For Then by. under Category. Clear Itemize every instance. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. and click OK. 3 While pressing CTRL. click Modify.

80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Material: Area. for Material: Cost. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. and click Properties. type Estimated Cost.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. click Estimated Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Calculate totals. and click Add. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. 21 Click OK. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 20 For Formula. for Fields. 23 For Field formatting. select Currency. under Available fields. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.40 50. click Edit. click the Formatting tab. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and under Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 12 Click OK. for Name. 19 For Type. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Calculated Value. and click OK twice. under Other. select Material: Cost.

28 For Unit symbol. either within family components or within the project template. 26 In the Project Units dialog. not just for currency. for Currency. 30 Click OK twice.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. which inserts commas after every three digits. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Digit grouping. for Rounding. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. regardless of category. 29 Select Use digit grouping. The cost fields are formatted correctly. you create a shared parameter file. adding the shared parameters to a family. tag the line. you create an exiting plan for the building. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. click the Format value.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. can be used for any number-based parameter. and reporting the shared parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. and are defined and stored in an external file. In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. select $. You draw a travel path line. 27 In the Format dialog. 31 Save the file.

type Path ID. for Name. click Create. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. type Travel Distance. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. click New. for File name. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for Name. select Length. 9 Under Parameters.rvt. type Exiting. under Groups. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. click Training Files. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.rvt. click Training Files. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Save. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Under Parameters. and click OK. for Name. 11 Click OK twice. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Type of Parameter. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.

the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rvt. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameter Type. and select Instance.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click OK. select Constraints. click Add. for Travel Distance Formula. following the equals symbol (=). and click OK. type Length. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Family Types. 10 Using the same method. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Parameters. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 3 On the Design Bar. 13 Click Apply. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. and click OK. under Parameter Data.rfa. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 Select Instance. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click OK. Click Training Files.rvt. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 15 If necessary. under Parameters. in the Load into Projects dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . under Dimensions. click Load into Projects. group it under Dimensions. If you have multiple projects open. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 14 On the Design Bar. select Shared parameter. for Group parameter under. and click Select. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add.

18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar.rft. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Parameters. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Training Files. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click (Add Parameter). select Travel Distance. click Select. 24 Click OK twice. click parameter(s) to label). click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 In the Edit Label dialog. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters.

rfa. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Projects. for File Name. 33 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and click Save. 32 In the Save As dialog.rvt is selected. and press DELETE. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. type M_Travel Distance Tag. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 35 Save the file. select Path ID. 29 In the drawing window. click Modify. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.28 On the Design Bar. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and move it down.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 6 Move the cursor to the right. double-click Exiting Plan . 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Tagging.rvt. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. After the lines are tagged.Placing. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. above the exterior door as shown. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.

under Constraints. 13 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 dashed travel lines. through the door. verify that Chain is selected. click Component. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan .Level 2. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Leader. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. type 1-1. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines.7 Move the cursor down. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. for Path ID. under Floor Plans. Placing. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner.Tagging. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . and click outside of the building. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. 10 On the Options Bar.

21 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 23 Move the cursor down. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 20 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 .24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. . 30 Using the same method. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. under Constraints. under Category. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. type Level 1 Exit Distance. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. 28 While pressing CTRL. type 2-1. 33 For Name. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. for Path ID. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.

select contains. under Other. type 1-. 45 In the Rename View dialog.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. click Training Files. click Edit. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. 44 In the Project Browser. select Path ID. 40 Click the Formatting tab. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 46 In the Project Browser. in the third field. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 For Filter by. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in the second field. select Path ID and Travel Distance. while pressing CTRL. 49 Click OK twice. and under Field formatting. under Schedules/Quantities. under Available fields. and click Rename. type 2-. 38 For Sort by. and click Add. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. 41 Under Fields. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. for Filter by. 43 In the Project Browser. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the first field. select Path ID. 42 Click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and in the third field. select Travel Distance. for Filter. 50 Save the file. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. 47 In the Element Properties dialog.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Partitions . and select C1010145 . 10 In the schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. click the Fields tab.152 mm.Interiors ➤ C10 . 4 Under Available fields. and click OK. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select Walls. select the following fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Categories. and click . for Assembly Code. under Identity Data.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . click the Value field. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click Properties.Fixed Partitions. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click View.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . right-click the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand C . right-click Generic .

click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click OK. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. under Database. 11 Click OK 3 times. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click Next. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 9 Under Directories. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and click OK to create the database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Next. click Create. click the File Data Source tab. 1 On the File menu. the database display may be different than that shown. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access.mdb. 6 Click Finish.rvt. select a location for the database file. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.mdb). 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. for Database Name. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.11 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New. type Revit_Project.

which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Additionally. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 13 Close the exercise file. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. For example. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . in addition to the Id column. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

262 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. 263 .

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In the callout view. and metal studs. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. add detail components. These components display at the required scale. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In order to detail from the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. 297 . you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. like a standard door header condition.Detailing 7 In this tutorial.

navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click Open. click Detail Component. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. and insulation objects. you detail the view of the roof edge. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click the detail callout head. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. region objects. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. You load detail components. The roof overhang detail displays. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 7 In the drawing area. as well as detail lines. 5 In the alert dialog. After you add components. They are also view specific. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select As underlay. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Training Files. click Training Files.rfa.rvt. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. which means that all detail components. Exact location is not important.

8 Delete the component. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click OK twice. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Detailing the View | 299 . select Corrugated Metal. click (Element Properties). enter Corrugated Metal Siding. and click OK. click Repeating Detail. click Edit/New. enter 406. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.5mm. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 17 In the drawing area. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 For Spacing. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.

click Load. click (Move). 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.rfa. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and click Open. click Detail Component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. ■ ■ Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 24 In the Type Selector. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.

31 To properly orient the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. you load them as a group from a single file. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. click Detail Component.rvt. 33 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown. Detailing the View | 301 . click Training Files. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click OK.

Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain.

as shown. For Offset. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. select to near side. and on the Edit toolbar. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 42 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click (Move). click Insulation. ■ Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. enter 140mm. Detailing the View | 303 . click Detail Component.

as shown. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 51 Click Modify.rvt. Like detail components. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. and lock the component. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 2 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. you add lines to your detail. they are view specific. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal.45 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. meaning they display only in this view. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 47 In the Type Selector.

For Offset. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar.4 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select Medium Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. select Thin Lines. enter 10mm. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. as shown. as shown.

306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). select Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain. as shown.

select Vapor Barrier. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar.18 In the Type Selector. For Offset. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. right-click. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. click Detail Lines. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and press ENTER. 22 In the Project Browser. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click OK. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Do not display. draw the detail lines as shown. Click (Pick Lines). What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. When you turn the display model off. select Thin Lines. and click Properties. 26 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 10mm. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select the Penthouse level line.

TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select M_Break Line. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Detail Component.29 On the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 32 Click Modify. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.

5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Enter the text. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.rvt. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Adding Text Notes | 309 . Click again to specify the location of the text box. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify.

enter Roof Overhang Detail . click Select All Instances. for Suffix. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click 6 In the Filter dialog. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK.rvt. and press DELETE. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and click the dimension text. right-click. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. (Filter Selection). and save the exercise file. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.7 Select the dimension line.. Creating Detail Components on page 310. and click OK. under Text Fields. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. select a text note. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click Rename. right-click. right-click.Keynotes. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typ. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Options Bar.

15 Use a window to select all linework. Creating Detail Components | 311 . select Medium Lines. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select all the coping linework. and selecting the chain. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 16 Click Modify.7 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. and click Open. while pressing CTRL. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. 14 Click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. pressing TAB. in the Type Selector. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.rft.

click Training Files. 31 Using the same method used previously. The original linework remains selected. 21 To place the component. navigate to your preferred location. and click Save. and click Open. click Detail Component. enter Roof Edge.rfa. 23 Using a window. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component.18 In the Save As dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 22 Click Modify. you place keynotes on objects. 30 In the drawing area. select the coping. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for File name. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. While pressing SHIFT. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click . click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 28 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. clear Detail Items. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 26 Press DELETE.Keynotes view is not the open view. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 24 On the Options Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Load. delete the underlying linework. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 27 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog. and the component can be placed in the detail. double-click it in the Project Browser.

use keynote 06160.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click to place the leader arm.rvt. select the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. In the Keynotes dialog.D11. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Adding Keynotes | 313 .B5. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. click Keynote ➤ Element. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files.rfa. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 19mm Plywood. Roof Edge4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. use keynote 07645. For the metal coping. and click OK. click Edit/New. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. (Element Properties).C1. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 6 Click Modify. 2 In the alert dialog. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.

and click . select Corrugated Metal. click Detail Component.D1. use keynote 06110. FasciaProfile_1. 17 Keynote the component. click Keynote ➤ Element. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.20 Ga. For the 50 x 200. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. using keynote 07460. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 06160. 22mm Corrugated Steel . a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 09250.D11. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. click in the Value column.G1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. use keynote 06110. You do this in order to keynote the component. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 18 Save the file. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. For the 50 x 150. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 50 x 300. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.F1. navigate to 07645. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.I1.9 In the Type Properties dialog. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.F1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .A8.

click Training Files. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Lock the line. 4 In the Type Selector. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click (Element Properties). click Training Files. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . and click Open. 24 While pressing CTRL. select the left end point of the reference line.rft. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. navigate to your preferred location. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 11 Press DELETE. select Medium Line Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and select the right end point. 5 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Detail Component. for File name. select Medium Lines. and click Open. click Edit/New. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. 8 In the Save As dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Load. 19 In the Name dialog. 15 Click Modify. 16 Select the component.

49 With the component selected. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530.25 Next. 42 Using the same method used previously. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and assign it keynote 06110. 34 In the Name dialog. and click . 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 28 In the Type Selector. 47 Select the component. and click OK. and hidden) used in the view. invisible.A5. and assign it keynote 07260. against the 19mm plywood. click Edit/New. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. 29 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. click in the Value column. and click . and click the lower end at the break line. click (Move). Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 46 Click Modify. and click . click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.G1. 48 Using the same method used previously. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 31 Select the component. name the component Air Barrier. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.A1. enter EPDM Membrane. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 30 Click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 27 On the Design Bar. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 38 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. select m_Light Line Detail Component.

53 On the Options Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 55 Click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select Chain. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click . 52 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. leaving the detail component lines.

60 On the Design Bar. Air Barrier.rfa. 68 In the drawing area. 61 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. select Invisible Lines. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element.A4. 67 In the Type Selector. 50 x 200 Framing. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. in the Type Selector. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 07260. click Load into Projects.58 Using the method used previously. select the component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier.

Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and press TAB. The database file opens in a text editor. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Browse. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. name the component Batt Insul. and press TAB.A1. and assign it keynote 07210. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 71 In the drawing area. Enter 07460. Enter 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 72 Save the file. and click . 70 Using the method used previously. and close the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. and press ENTER.69 Select the component. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 3 In the text editor.A9. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. add a keynote for the component.A4. click File menu ➤ Save. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. under Keynote Table. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.txt. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer..

as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.txt. select Absolute. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model. under Path Type. After you create a drafting view. and click to place the note. and click Open. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 14 Save the file. select all the keynotes. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 11 Click Modify. you learn how to create a drafted detail. and click OK. click to place the leader.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Each keynote displays as a simple number. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.A1. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. In the Type Selector. click Keynote ➤ Element. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 9 In the drawing area. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 13 Click Modify. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07463. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.

and click OK. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. enter EPDM Metal Coping. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Positioning. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Click Open. right-click Drafting 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select Black and White. click Training Files.dwg. The detail is imported as an import symbol. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.Center to Center is selected. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321.rvt. select 1 : 5. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Colors. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that Auto . Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. for Scale. and click OK. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.

for New.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the callout. delete the existing value. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 10 In the Rename dialog. and click Properties. 12 Click OK twice. select Reference other view. click Edit/New. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. enter Detail . The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 5 Click Modify.No Reference. click Callout. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Rename. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.

Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.No Reference). under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . double-click A105 . click Modify. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Sect. 18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .Elev. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser./Det. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. and double-click the callout. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Gypsum-Plaster. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 14 Click OK 3 times. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. and click OK.rvt. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. and click OK. click Edit/New. for Name. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Board. click Detail Component. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Gyp. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. for Name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. . 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Name dialog.

15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select the left and bottom edges of the region. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror). and enter 20. 17 Click Modify. click (Draw). 16 Select the left edge of the region. 19 In the Type Selector. select the width dimension. click Finish Sketch. click . click 22 On the Options Bar.5mm. 20 On the Design Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 18 While pressing CTRL.

33 Click OK 3 times.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Name. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Region Properties. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Edit/New.Finish. Move the cursor up.Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 30 In the Name dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. enter Wood . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wood . 25 Click Modify.

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. verify that the thickness is 19mm.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 37 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. sketch the new region as shown. 38 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the wood region. click (Align). verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 40 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 39 In the Type Selector.5mm. Draw a rectangle as shown. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click . select Medium Lines. select Medium Lines.

(Align). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. For Offset. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 6mm. and press ENTER. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Finish Sketch. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. For Offset. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click 48 Click Modify. 47 Click the reference plane.42 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Ref Plane.

54 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm. 56 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor left 25mm. Move the cursor right 25mm. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and press ENTER. For Offset. Select Chain. enter 0. and select the bottom horizontal line. and click to select the point.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw).

click Load. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. enter 3mm. 60 Select the left. and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Detail Lines. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 69 Select the bolt. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. enter 76. For Offset. select Medium Lines.rfa. 65 On the Options Bar. and click Open. click Detail Component. click Training Files. and press ENTER.2mm. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 68 Click Modify. top. 58 In the Type Selector. and right edges of the door panel region. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the height dimension. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

76 In the Type Selector.rfa. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 74 Select the expansion bolt. use the images as a guide. click Load. 71 On the Options Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. select Wide Lines. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.70 On the Design Bar. and click Open. click Training Files. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Detail Component.

(Mirror). 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Thin Lines. 87 Click Modify. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click . 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. 82 Select the rectangle. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.78 On the Design Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click .

88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 90 In the Type Selector. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 92 Select the line. click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 89 On the Design Bar. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click (Mirror). select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . as shown.

click . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and click to place the arc as shown. 103 Add two break lines as shown.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 102 In the Type Selector. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 99 Click Modify. select the length dimension. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. enter 3mm. 97 On the Options Bar. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 95 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. and press ENTER. 101 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component.

5mm Arial. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. 107 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. using the Drag Text grip. 110 Select the dimension line. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click Modify. 106 Click to place the dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. and click Modify.

336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 113 Under Text Fields. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. and click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. click Dimension. select Replace With Text.2. and then click the dimension text. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 114 Click OK. under Dimension Value. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . for Below. enter See Schedule. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 118 Select Modify to end the command.5mmArial.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . and on the Options Bar. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 125 In the Options Bar. click to create an arced leader. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. click Text. and click Modify. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click to place the text. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 126 In the drawing area. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 128 Select the note. Board. 127 Enter Gyp. select the gypsum board region on the left. 123 Click OK.121 Click OK.

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. 339 . Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.rvt. and double-click East. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. click Training Files.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Modify. click Training Files. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. type 1.Hexagon. click Symbol. 8 Select the keynote. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 5 On the Options Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. for Number of Leaders.rfa. 7 On the Design Bar.

click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Copy). 12 On the Edit toolbar. on the Options Bar. type Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text. under Identity Data. 13 Select the tag.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. Creating a Note Block | 341 . and click above the tag to place the copy.

make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.14 With the copy selected. (Mirror). 16 For Tag. 19 With the tag selected. 17 Click OK. 15 For Text. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Element Properties). clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click Copy. type B. on the Edit toolbar. 18 Using the same method. type Repair existing door surround. and click. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. using the table as a reference. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . click Modify. Remove all existing windows. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair as required. 22 Optionally. Clean exterior brick wall. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Tuckpoint as required.

and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. for Sort by. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet.Elevations. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. Select Text. and double-click A103 . select Center. and click OK. for the value. type Mark. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. On the Formatting tab. verify that Arial is selected. expand Sheets (all). for Note block name. select Tag. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. under Available fields. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type Exterior Construction Notes. Create. and click Add. select Tag. and select Bold. 29 In the Project Browser. and for Alignment. select Exterior Construction Notes. Clean cut and repair wall as required. 27 In the column header (text). On the Appearance tab. format. for Heading. for Header text. type 6 mm. expand Schedules/Quantities. 26 Click OK.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Description.

32 Zoom in to see the note block. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. click Modify. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). Using Drawing Lists | 345 .31 On the Design Bar. double-click T . Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.

6 In the Project Browser. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. in the first field. select Sheet Index. double-click T . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and in the third field. for Sort by. Select Sheet Name. expand Schedules/Quantities. The drawing list displays. select does not equal. ■ 4 Click OK. under Available fields. select Sheet Number. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Add. On the Filter tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text.Title Sheet. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. in the second field. under Sheets (all). type T. for Filter by. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Number.

doors. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. windows. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. door frame schedule. 11 Save the file. For the text. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. and door frames. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. On construction documents. and so on). Finally. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. click Modify. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Training File Using Legends | 347 .

and click OK. 9 For Text Font. click Duplicate.Open Level Head . click . 10 For Text Size.rvt. type Typical Symbol Legend. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Edit/New.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. select Arial. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. for Name.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Text. for Name. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . type Legend Text. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 3mm. click Symbol. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.

expand Legends. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . click Typical Symbol Legend. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. expand Sheets (all). 14 Working from the top down.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and double-click A101 . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and for Leader. verify that is selected. 16 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.

A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 23 Save the file. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify.17 In the Type Selector.Unit 18. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. under Sheets. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 . 21 In the Type Selector. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.

3 For Scale. type 4th Floor Wall Types.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. for Name. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. and click OK. select Medium for Detail Level. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and press ENTER. select 1 : 50. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. For Host length. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.rvt. click Legend Component. type 900 mm. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. For View. select Section. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 5 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 351 .

and on the Options Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 12 In the Type Selector. click to add text without a leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for Family. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for Leader.9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

and click New Sheet. under Floor Plans. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 19 Type the following text. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . and drag it to the new sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Level 4. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 23 In the Project Browser. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click OK to accept the default titleblock. right-click Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar.

click Modify to end the command. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 29 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Legends. drag it onto the sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click Level 4.25 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select Detail Level: Medium. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. select the Wall Type 2 component. Creating a Component Legend | 355 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the floor plan view. 35 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.

Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. You can create a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.36 Optionally. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Using the table. double-click Level 4. click 37 Save the file. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. contractor inquiries. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . These changes can be due to owner requests.

When Issued is selected. verify that Per Project is selected. In most instances. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . If Visible is not selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. if the active revision is number 1. 7 Under Show. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. for Numbering. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. yet as concise as possible. When you use this option. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. type a date. In general. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. If you select Per Sheet. For example. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. the revision is locked and issued to the field.

rvt. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you make changes to the project floor plan. 6 On the Design Bar. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor up. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. under Floor Plans. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 3 Select the divider. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.8 Click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. including revision number and revision date. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). double-click Level 4. 5 Select the divider. 9 Save the file. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. select Snaps Off. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . In the Snaps dialog. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 8 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.

Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 16 Click OK. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. select 6. you load a revision tag into the project. 17 Save the file. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category.

11 Click to place the tag. click Training Files. 5 In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . Because you chose to number by project. select Leader. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Load. 4 On the Options Bar. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 10 In the drawing area. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. double-click Level 4. the cloud is tagged as number 1. You then issue a revision. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 12 Save the file. under Floor Plans. click Tags.rfa. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. you need to add one. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. and because the revision is the first in the project. Working with Revisions In this exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 8 In the Tags dialog. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.rvt. click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and enter a date for the revision. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Issued. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 7 For Description. You can continue to add revisions. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 9 Click OK.rvt.Unnamed. NOTE After you issue a revision. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type Modify Paving Area. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. you can no longer modify it. click Add. and enter a date. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 8 Add another revision row. and click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. you prevent further changes to the revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click A107 . with the description Relocate Door.

2 . apply Seq. double-click Level 4. select Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions | 363 . 17 Using the same method learned previously. 3 .Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 20 On the Project Browser. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Sheets (all). 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Relocate Door to the revision cloud.Unnamed.Modify Paving Area. 12 In the drawing area. select Seq. 10 In the Project Browser. for Revision. select Revision Cloud. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. in the drawing area. double-click A107 . 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select the revision cloud. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Drafting tab. click to add a revision clouds. 13 Click Finish Sketch. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 19 To add tags. 15 On the Options Bar.

height. and rotation) to the revision schedule. delete the first 3 characters. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. For each revision. beginning with "D". select the titleblock.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Sequence. 25 Click OK twice. for Numbering. you edit the titleblock family. You do this so that the revision can be changed. 26 In the drawing area. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. clear Issued. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. Click Options. select Alphabetic. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. for Appearance. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. and press DELETE. select Bottom-up. click Modify. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . click Yes. click Edit. Select Grid lines. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and drag it above the schedule area. 28 In the alert dialog. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. under Other. click Load into Projects. 34 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. click Yes. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.27 On the Options Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. for Build Schedule. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 33 Select the schedule header. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and click Properties. click Edit Family. Clear Blank row before data. Select Outline. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built.

open the titleblock family for editing. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. With a user-defined height. 45 On the Appearance tab. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Height. When the height property is variable. and click Properties. right-click Revision Schedule. for Rotation on Sheet. enter Rev. select 90° Counterclockwise.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 46 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 40 Select the revision schedule header. under Other. select User defined. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. select the revision schedule. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Heading.. for Formatting.

50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects. click Yes. text. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . you learn to import information (such as images. 51 Save the file. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.

for Leader. click to add text without a leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. under Sheets. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG.Title Sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. double-click T . double-click T .Title Sheet.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Modify. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 5 On the Design Bar. click Text. 1 In the Project Browser. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the Options Bar.

Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Modify. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 11 Save the file. 6 Select the text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .doc text file in another window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. with the new text box still selected. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.

2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click File menu ➤ Print.xls. 4 Under Printer.mdi. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. under Sheets. select the document writer.JPG.rvt. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and click Save. 3 In Microsoft Excel. This step has been completed for you. 5 Click OK. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 7 In the Revit Architecture window. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Training Files. This process may vary from system to system. 10 On the Design Bar. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 1 In the Project Browser. for File name. double-click A102 . 12 Save the file.Unit 18. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. click Modify.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Desktop.JPG. type Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.

To effectively document this project. you break up the plan into sections. as well as a large lab building. or footprint. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. called dependent views. 371 . The large floor plan.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 In the drawing area.Aviary. right-click Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . select the crop region. and click Rename. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. for Name. The dependent view opens. 5 Click in the drawing area. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and the model crop is the interior crop region. and click OK. enter Level 2 . double-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. under Floor Plans.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. enter Level 2 . and click Rename. 11 In the Project Browser. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.10 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. for Name.Labs. 14 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and on the Zoom flyout.

) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. double-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). 20 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. click Matchline. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View Control Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views.

click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. and click.

33 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 For Line Pattern. select Double Dash. click Level 2 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. enter Level 2 Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . and click OK. for Name. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.Unnamed. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Aviary. and drag it onto the sheet. right-click A101 . Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. for Line Weight. and click Rename. expand Sheets. select 9. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK. 27 Under Matchline.

380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Target view. click View Reference.35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Aviary is selected. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. click Modify. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. and place the Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2.Labs dependent view on the sheet.

click Zoom To Fit.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. for Target view.Labs. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 41 On the Options Bar.

click the far right control. after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 49 If.46 In the Project Browser. 48 Select the crop region. right-click. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 47 On the View Control Bar. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.Aviary. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. double-click Level 2 . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click (Show Crop Region).

Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. under Floor Plans. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . and click OK. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. right-click Level 2. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 53 In the Select Views dialog. 54 In the Project Browser. expand Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. select all views in the list.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. but are not placed on sheets. and click Apply Dependent Views. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale.

57 On the Zoom flyout. The matchline is already placed in the view. click Training Files. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and double-click South Elevation. click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click South Elevation. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 In the drawing area. 7 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 .The dependent view opens. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Left. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. enter South Elevation . for Name. click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the lab building. 11 Select the crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 4 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. and click OK. enter South Elevation . 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the view. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. and click OK. expand South Elevation. and click Rename. cropping the view to the aviary. select the Crop Region. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right.Right.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The perspective view displays. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.rvt. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

as shown. and click Show Camera. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. in the Project Browser. and adjust the field of vision. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. With the camera shown. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. right-click 3D View 1. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and select the crop boundary. as necessary. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. If the camera is not shown in the view. Depending on camera placement.

9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 Save the file.Day. and click Rename. under 3D Views. enter Exterior . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. right-click 3D View 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK.6 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407.

under 3D Views.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. You then duplicate the view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . modify render settings. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. and render a daytime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Day. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

under Background. for New. and click Render. select Edit/New. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. under Lighting. for Setting.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If a background image is required. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. 3pm. In this case. for Sun. enter Spring Equinox . For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Sky: Cloudy. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. select Medium. select Spring Equinox. 7 In the Rendering dialog.Santa Monica. 6 Click OK twice. You adjust cloud settings as required. 5 In the Rename dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. You create a location and time for the rendering. 8 Under Quality. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . After the image is rendered. click Desktop. Click Save. For Files of type. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Export. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 10 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. select Portable Network Graphics (*. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.png).

15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . To select a sequential list. click New.Flat Round : 60W . highlight 9 :Sconce Light .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . for Name. under Group Options. press and hold SHIFT. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. on the View Control Bar. and select the last light. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. and click Move to Group. click Dialog). select the first light. for Name. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. 25 Using the same method. click Render.Flat Round : 60W . click New.Night view open. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Day. under Ungrouped Lights. click OK. and click OK. under Lighting. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Exterior: Artificial only. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.120V.Exterior . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Flat Round : 60W .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . verify that Pool Lights is selected.Night. under Group Options. add 30 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. enter Pool Lights.Night. right-click Exterior . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. and click Artificial Lights. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. enter Pool House Lights.120V to the Pool Lights group. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 16 With the Exterior .Day view to Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . dialog. for Scheme. 22 Using the same method.

Rendering an Interior View | 411 . 30 In the Rendering dialog. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. for Exposure Value. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. under Image. you change the brightness of the exposure. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. In this example. After the image is rendered. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 32 Save the file. click Show the model. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. click Adjust Exposure. enter 4.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. and finally.rvt. render the views. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Modify. ■ (Rotate). 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the figure. the person’s line of sight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and place the component inside the pool house. select RPC Female : YinYin. Adding RPC People | 413 . under Floor Plans. Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click Component. 4 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar.

10 In the Type Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Modify. 12 Click OK 3 times. on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). In order to see the figure’s reflection. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. click Edit/New. under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. By default. under Identity Data. click Edit. you can enable this option. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 Save the file. for Render Appearance Properties. select Cast Reflections.

Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. click Camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective.15 Proceed to the next exercise.

416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and click Properties. and click OK. under 3D Views. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser. under Extents. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.The perspective view displays. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

under Floor Plans. in addition to the 3D view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. 11 In the 3D view. In order to accurately adjust the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click South. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . double-click Level 1. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. right-click. 14 In the 3D view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 13 In the South Elevation view.

Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. and curtain walls. To create a daytime view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Save the file. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and render the interior view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. doors that contain windows or glass. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.15 Maximize the 3D view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall.

You can specify a lower quality. click Render. select Interior: Artificial only. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. and click OK. under Lighting. and click OK.rvt. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click Rename. for Scheme.Night. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 4 In the Rendering dialog. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. After these settings are established. 5 Click Artificial Lights. c_Pool_House_in_progress. select Draft. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Interior . 7 Under Quality. for Setting. 3 On the View Control Bar. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. clear Pool Lights. click (Show Rendering Dialog). right-click 3D View 1. you turn them off for this scene. under 3D Views. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.

9 Close the Rendering dialog. but the space will receive standard daylighting. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.Santa Monica. By default they are turned off.Night. 13 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. select Curtain Walls. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. for Sun. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. and click OK. select Spring Equinox . the daylight portals can be turned on. right-click Interior . NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Scheme.Day. select Interior: Sun only. You create a view for the interior during the day. The preset schemes are read-only. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. select Edit. select Region. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . click 14 For Setting. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. and click Render. For more information on daylight portals. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. (Show Rendering Dialog). 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 17 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . for Daylight Portal Options. you must create a custom setting. in order to turn on daylight portals. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. For sunlit interiors. In this case. click Copy To Custom.

18 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and close the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Click OK. click Adjust Exposure. under Image. enter 10. select the column on the right. enter 1. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 20 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Properties). click Show the model. In the next steps. For Saturation.

23 With the column still selected. For Rotate. click OK. click the dimensions for Size. and click OK. for Resolution. and on the Options Bar. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 28 In the Rendering dialog. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection.6. and click Render. For Bump. 29 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . select High. enter 5''. select Wood. For Width. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Printer. you can define the output and quality settings for final output.22 In the Element Properties dialog. You change the varnish setting. clear Region. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Scale (locked proportions). click (Show Rendering Dialog). 30 In the drawing area. the render time increases significantly. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Based on wood grain. As size and DPI are increased. select the crop boundary. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. add a bump map to create texture. under Output Settings. select Unfinished. Click OK. 26 Click Update Preview. for Setting. For Amount. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. enter 90. 24 In the Materials dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Usually. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. elevation. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. but you can also define it in a 3D. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. In a plan view. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. independent of the Revit Architecture software. or section view.The rendered image displays.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Perspective is selected. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. on the Options Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 .■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Settings ➤ Project Units. If you prefer to use metric values. and change unit formats as desired. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. proceeds through the dining room. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Townhouse. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1st Floor. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Training Files. click Walkthrough.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click Finish. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 17 Click . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and for Height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and click OK. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Edit Walkthrough. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and click OK. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . on the Options Bar. enter 1. 11 Under Change. click the dimensions for Size. enter 9''. If it is not. for Frame. 16 On the Options Bar. verify that Field of view is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. for Width. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 16''. 12 On the View menu. and select the crop boundary. 14 Click . select the crop boundary.

The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. under Extents.The walkthrough plays. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. click Edit Walkthrough. click (Element Properties). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. c_Townhouse. proceed to the next exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. double-click 1st Floor. clear Far Clip Active. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. press ESC.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position.

NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and click Save. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. When you export the walkthrough. for Compressor. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. shading with edges. for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. and click OK. c_Townhouse. double-click Walkthrough 1. for Frames/sec. . 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. on the Options Bar. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. select <Shading>. under Output Length. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 8 If you want to save this exercise. hidden line. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. or rendering. 9 To play the walkthrough. 3 Under Format. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. specifying the number of frames. under Walkthroughs. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The walkthrough is recorded. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. enter 15. click Edit Walkthrough. shading. reducing the size of the image.rvt. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. If you are unsure of what option to use. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.

you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. More specifically. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. In this tutorial.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. 431 . Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.

rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. and double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View In this exercise. (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.Creating a Solar Study . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. click shown. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A 3D view is created. click Training Files. click Camera. expand Views (all).

3 On the Design Bar. and click OK.5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. expand 3D Views. you create a section cutaway view. click Section. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View. if necessary. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study . and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Save As. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. right-click 3D View 1. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . as shown. 9 On the File menu. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

double-click the section head. (SteeringWheels). 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify. and click Rename. 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click OK. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 6 To view the section. right-click Section 1. as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. 7 In the Project Browser.5 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click 10 On the View toolbar. click . 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right.

17 To hide the section box. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. In some cases. 5 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click {3D}. click Save. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. including the house. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. do not display many elements in 3D. 15 In the Rename View dialog. double-click 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and click Rename. then select Medium. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. then Fine. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . click . 6 In the Rename View dialog. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. Typical plan views. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click OK. click Callout. you create a plan cutaway view. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 18 On the File menu. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. clear Section Boxes. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. as shown.14 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.8 On the View toolbar. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. so you can see into the building from the top. 15 Select the Roof. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click (SteeringWheels). and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar.

under 3D Views. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. right-click {3D}. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. and click OK.17 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Rename. click Save. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. for City. You can create a still. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. or multi-day solar study. and click OK. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. click click OK. expand 3D Views. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and time. Los Angeles. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. and click Duplicate. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. click .Creating Solar Studies . For the Single-Day solar study. 9 In the Name dialog. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. Click the Single-Day tab. . For the Multi-Day solar study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Summer Solstice. USA is selected.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 10 Under Place. click . date. date range. CA. leave the slider at 50. 4 For Sun Position. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View.Boston. MA. For this study. expand Views (all). you specify the location. USA. you specify the location.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Los Angeles. and time range. single-day.

under Frame. Under Frame. Los Angeles is selected. Los Angeles. for Date. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. enter 20 and press ENTER. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. ■ For Time Interval. click . click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 2008. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun Position. select June 22.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. and click OK.Courtyard View is currently displayed. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. click OK. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level. enter 10 and press ENTER. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time Range. select December 22. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 19 On the File menu. select Winter Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. enter Winter Solstice. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . confirm that Summer Solstice. click OK. Los Angeles. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 8 On the Options Bar. 2008. 7 On the Options Bar. click Save. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In this case. and click OK.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Los Angeles. 13 On the View Control Bar. on the Single-Day tab. . click To display the next sequential frame. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. under Floor Plans. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Sun Position. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. double-click 01 Entry. click OK. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . click . click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area.■ To display the next key frame. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. The solar study animation plays. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. . click Text. click To play the animation from start to finish. 14 On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser.

click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 8 For Sun Position. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. expand 3D Views. click Lines. On the Options Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. approximately as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 6 On the View Control Bar. as shown. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click and enter Dining. 5 In the Project Browser. click .

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select Summer Solstice. 15 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Output Length. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Section Boxes. if necessary. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 11 To display the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. select the section box. click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 12 In the drawing area. as shown. select Frame Range. Los Angeles. 14 Click outside of the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. ■ For Frames per second. and enter 5 to 50.

enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. For Files of Type. For Dimensions. select AVI Files. on the Single-Day tab. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and enter 5 to 10. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. For Frames per second. Los Angeles. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. for Model Graphics Style. Under Format. for Model Graphics Style. select Frame Range. verify that the value is set to 15. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. and click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. click . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select Winter Solstice. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. To maintain the proportions of the frame. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 3 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.■ ■ Under Format. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. To view the animation. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. enter 450 in the first field (width). The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. or frame. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For File Name. for Compressor. you open each image. 2 On the View Control Bar. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . under Output Length.Los Angeles. of the animation separately. click OK.

click the Desktop icon. For Files of Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. In this example. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.Los Angeles. such as JPEG. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. under 3D Views.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. as shown: 9 On the File menu. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.■ For Dimensions. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. BMP. TIFF. 8 Click Save. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. or GIF. or any single-frame format. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. click Save. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. depending on the Frame Range. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For File name. enter 450 in the first field (width). The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. select PNG.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

For Time Interval. and click OK. USA. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and click OK. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. for File name enter 2pm . 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and on the View Control Bar. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click the Multi-Day tab.Los Angeles . 5 Select the roof. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. specify 2:00 pm. for Sun Position. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate. select One week. For Time.Boston. 12 In the Name dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 8 On the View Control Bar. MA.Week Interval. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. On the Annotation Categories tab. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.

enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. such as East . you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click Save. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.West or North . double-click 01 Entry.South. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . In the Length/Format dialog. When you mirror a project. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. you mirror all model elements. Click the Desktop icon.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and annotations in non-drafting views. for File Name. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. model views. 17 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Compressor. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click OK. under Floor Plans. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis.

click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. Then. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In this exercise. right-click. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. For additional information. select the roof.West. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.West axis. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 2 In the drawing area. 5 In the warning dialog. select East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 6 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. The project is mirrored along the East . you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.

click Apply. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . 12 Under Date and Time. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 5 For Sun Position. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. 8 For Sun Position. 10 Under Date and Time. 11 For Sun Position. For example. click the Still tab. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and select Winter Solstice. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM.3 On the View Control Bar. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. select Cast Shadows. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. Orienting to True North | 449 . on the Still tab. and click OK. click . click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

for Orientation. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click the Still tab. and click Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. right click 01 Entry. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 19 In the Project Browser. When a project is started. and click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. under Floor Plans. click OK.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. click OK. 15 For Sun Position. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. select True North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. the view settings must be set for True North. 14 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. and click OK. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases).

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. click toward the top of the screen.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 451 . as shown.

Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Apply. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click. and click Element Properties. enter True North Orientation. right-click. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 33 For Sun Position. select True North Orientation. 32 On the View Control Bar. right-click 01 Entry. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. for Orientation.23 In the Project Browser. select Project North. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. 27 In the Rename View dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select True North. and click OK. and click Properties. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 28 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab.

and click OK. for Compressor. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. For Files of Type. Orienting to True North | 453 . Los Angeles. enter 600 in the first field. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. under Format.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. Click Save. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Single-Day tab. for Dimensions. click OK. and click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. Click OK. For File Name. click the Desktop icon. click Summer Solstice.

Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. In this exercise. for Setting. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Edit/New. and click Duplicate. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and exporting it as a JPEG image. select 12/22. For Sun. under 3D Views. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. and click OK. This would include some exterior views and most interior views.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Winter Solstice. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the Name dialog. select Medium. and 2:00 PM. 3 On the View Control Bar. under Quality. capturing it. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. for Date and Time. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 2 In the Project Browser. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. click Render. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Since a rendered image is temporary. select Interior: Sun only. for Scheme. Under Lighting.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Settings. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

Rendering an Interior View | 455 . and click Save. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog.6 In the Rendering dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Desktop. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. click Export. verify that JPEG Files is selected. For Files of type. click Save to Project. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. and click OK. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.

456 .

an outside reviewer. type. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. Other tools in the software. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. advanced model graphics. When organizing presentation graphics. or the client. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. however. you explore the stylistic approach. linework. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. and section boxes. In this series of exercises. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. They include rendering. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. a consultant. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. For the realistic approach. sections. length. Using the pre-built building model. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. elevations. Co-house. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. 457 . Whether the audience is the general contractor. In this tutorial. and details. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture.

458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. To fit the floor plan into the analytique.

3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Cnst. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . and click OK. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. exit the menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and click Rename.rvt. click in the drawing area. right-click 2nd Flr. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

navigate to the folder of your choice. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and click Save. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Down Arrow. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 7 Under Visibility.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. UP Text. dimensions. 8 Click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and other annotations in this view. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. elevations. sections. 11 In the Save As directory. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and clear DOWN Text. this represents the view getting smaller. No annotations display in the view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and Up Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab.

select By Date. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 3 On the View Control Bar. Time and Place. ■ For Contrast. The higher the number. you can select any city. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. click the Place tab. specify 10/27. At that place. MA. however. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. the darker the shadows. For Sun Position. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. Cnst. click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings. click (Shadows Off). select Boston. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can create. and select 1st Flr. on the Still tab. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. specify 35. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 1:00 PM. 7 For Place. NOTE For this step. click . Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. If you select a different city. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 Under Settings. for Date and Time. click . modify.rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. Within a project. and click OK. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . 12 Click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 9 For City.

for Sun Position. under Settings.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. clear Ground Plane at Level. . This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click (Shadows On). 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and click to place it. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Add View. and notice the view title. select Arch Portrait. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 4 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and click View. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . TIP If the View tab is not available.

click Edit/New. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. for Show Title.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. under Graphics. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. select No. and click OK. and click OK. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click Activate View. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this. click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click . click Duplicate. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. For this analytique.

and the boundary of the region. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 22 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 20 On the Options Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. fill properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 18 On the Options Bar.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and select Chain. click . 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click Edit/New. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. select Invisible lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click Region Properties. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. If necessary. When you finish drawing the chain.

35 Proceed with the next lesson. click Finish Sketch. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. click Duplicate. scroll down.24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. under Graphics. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 25 In the Name dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. under Identity Data. and click View Properties. for Fill Pattern. for Sheet Name. click . enter Presentation. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Name. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Solid Black. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. right-click South. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Copy of South. click (Shadows Off). and click Rename. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 12 Under Shadow. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 14 For Sun Position. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click . select Cast Shadows. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Settings. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. on the Model Categories tab. specify 2:30 PM. and click OK. click Duplicate. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Visibility. 13 For Contrast. under Elevations. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Visibility. under Pattern Overrides. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. and click OK. click Override. clear Visible. click in the Walls row. select By Date. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 18 For Time. specify 35. Time and Place. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. expand the Doors category. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click Advanced Model Graphics.2 In the Project Browser. By changing the angle of the sun. 16 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 9 Click OK. click in the drawing area. and clear Elevation Swing. scroll up. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. exit the menu. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Presentation. click Add View. 3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays.

7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 .6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.

472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Cnst. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the Options Bar. click Section.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. select 1: 100. under Floor Plans. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. for Scale. and use the flip arrows if necessary. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

expand Sections (Callout 1). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . click Callout. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. select 1 : 100. and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. this view needs to be rotated 180°. as shown. To accomplish this.Section 2 is added to the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. for Scale.

click Override. click in the Walls row. double-click Presentation Section 2. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. expand the Doors category. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 17 Under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. enter Presentation Section 2. 15 Under Visibility. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1).Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Rename. scroll up. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click the Model Categories tab. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. under Pattern Overrides.

(Hide Crop Region). 22 On the View Control Bar. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 Click OK. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . click The crop regions no longer display.

6 In the Name dialog. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Duplicate. in the Project Browser.rvt. click . For Contrast. In addition. under Sections (Callout 1). you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. specify the following: Under Shadow. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. ■ For Sun Position. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. Click Apply. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify 35. In the steps that follow. The shadows do not offer much contrast. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. For Altitude. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. specify 135°. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click OK. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. NOTE The line style. Select Relative to View.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Directly. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . Click OK. For Azimuth. click (Shadows On). Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. specify 70°. for Silhouette style. Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. was added to this training file for training purposes.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click A105 . you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Presentation.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. click Add View. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. under Sheets (all). and click to place the selected view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet.

9 On the Edit toolbar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. In the steps that follow. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. The section needs to be rotated 180°. click (Rotate). 8 Select the callout that you added previously. under Sections (Callout 1). Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 2. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click Modify. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . select Viewport : Presentation. you click to specify the start radius. Using a clock as a reference.5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays. and press Enter. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. To rotate an object. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.

double-click A105 . The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all). 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation.The callout rotates 180°.

15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481.

right-click Section 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 7 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. you can simply apply the presentation view template.rvt. and click Rename. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Presentation. under Sections (Type 1).

and click Activate View. 15 Right-click the viewport.Presentation. annotations. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select 90° Counterclockwise. lighting fixtures. The furniture. under Names. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and elevation swings no longer display. and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. under Sheets (all). under Graphics. click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Section: Presentation Section 1. double-click A105 . 12 In the Views dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select Presentation. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. for Rotation on Sheet. and click Deactivate View. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Add View to Sheet.

Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. such as a tracery window or a column capital. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. traditional analytiques contain a detail. In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you add the callout. click Callout. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . click Modify. select the callout. under Sections (Type 1). as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1.

and click View Properties. enter Presentation Callout. double-click Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 6 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). under Extents. and click OK. 8 Right-click.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Annotation Crop. 7 Select the crop region.

14 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. click Modify. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. Click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. specify 22. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Callout. select Custom. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . double-click A105 . click Add View. For Scale Value 1.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation.

activate the viewport. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. In the steps that follow. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and make adjustments as necessary. click Filled Region. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. When finished. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 23 On the Design Bar. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. and click Deactivate View. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. and move it to the position shown below. under Sections (Callout 1).19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. The composition set for the analytique is now complete.

click Finish Sketch. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times.25 In the Type Properties dialog. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 28 In the Project Browser. on the Design Bar. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. click . for Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. under Sheets (all). 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .Presentation. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. When you are finished. and click Activate View. select Solid fill.

490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 33 On the View Control Bar.31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 34 Select the crop region. 32 On the Design Bar. click . The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click (Show Crop Region).

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click (Hide Crop Region).35 On the View Control Bar. and click Deactivate View.

rvt. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply shadows to the views. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1 : 200. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. under 3D Views. 5 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

enter Isometric 2. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. specify 45°. 13 In the Project Browser. For Contrast. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Section Box. For Altitude. 8 In the Name dialog. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. A section box displays around the building model.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Directly. enter Isometric 1. right-click Isometric. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. specify 35. for Silhouette style. For Sun Position. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. specify 135°. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. Select 1st Flr. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Azimuth. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. under 3D Views. under Extents. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. click . Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. select Cast Shadows. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Cnst. in the list. 12 In the Rename View dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click Isometric 2. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Grips display on each face of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor.19 Select the section box.

and click Rename. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 3. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 25 To hide the section box. and click OK. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. In the Type Selector. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. 29 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. Next. double-click Isometric 3. double-click A105 . the stairs and railings may display. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 27 Select the section box. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . If desired. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. The section box no longer displays. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. you can adjust the plane location. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under Sheets (all).Presentation. 23 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. When you are finished. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. select Viewport : Presentation.

drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown.32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views. 33 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport : Presentation. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector.

36 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the poche filled region. 41 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 39 For Background. 42 Using the drawing tools. for Fill Patterns. On the Options Bar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The image below shows the redrawn lines. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . select Transparent. click Edit/New. 40 Click OK twice. and click Activate View. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Edit. select Concrete. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done.

45 In the Type Properties dialog. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Solid fill. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 46 Click OK twice. and click Deactivate View. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch.43 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Edit/New. 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range. you create the final view for the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. a cutaway perspective view. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you add it to the presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. Cnst. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . The view opens immediately.

7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Sun Position. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. specify 35. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . select Cast Shadows. select Silhouette Edges. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. for Name. and click OK. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Contrast. specify the following: Under Shadow. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.

Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 12 Select the section box. select Section Box. A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. Grips display on each plane of the section box. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.

14 Select the crop region. 21 In the Project Browser. enter 165 mm. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. 18 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). under 3D Views. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser.Presentation. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. under Change. clear Section Boxes. you must specify the actual size of the image. select Viewport : Presentation. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. double-click A105 . In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. for Width. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box. click Size. and click OK. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. under Text. click Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the same font as the title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . click Duplicate. enter Title. click . click OK. select a font.22 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 23 Proceed with the next exercise. enter Description. 10 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.Presentation sheet is not the active view. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. specify a text size of 40 mm. select Text : Title. 6 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique on page 503.

18 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Text : Description. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. In this tutorial. Once the model has been imported. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. and roofs.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. curtain walls. 507 . you can easily add detail with Revit components. After you import the SketchUp model. that compose the building. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

under Template file. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. enter SketchUp Model. Double-click the Common folder. 10 In the Name dialog.rte. For Layers. For Files of type. select SketchUp Files. 6 In the Save As dialog. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Import units. click Browse. click OK. click the Massing tab. right-click in the Design Bar. and not in the library. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . or select from a list. Click the Sketchup file.skp. enter Import SketchUp. for File name. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. select Preserve. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 9 In the informational dialog. click Create Mass. and click OK.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. click OK. For Colors. select Auto-Detect. select All. you create a Revit Architecture project. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Save. visible elements. buildings. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar.

depending on the complexity of the project. For Place at level. Level 1 is the only choice. Click Open. select Level 1. In a new project. such as walls. curtain walls. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click . select Manual .You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. and roofs.Center. ■ ■ For Positioning. 17 In the warning dialog. click Finish Mass. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. click the Close button. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry.

click Roof by Face. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. and on the View Control Bar. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. verify Level 2 is selected. that compose the building. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. 4 On the Options Bar.18 Proceed to the next exercise. verify Basic Roof: Generic . you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. 3 In the Type Selector. and roofs. curtain walls. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. such as walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. After you create the building from the mass faces. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements.400mm displays. select the face so that it highlights in red. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 6 On the Options Bar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. A roof is created from the mass face. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. on the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. To see the new roof. click Create Roof. on the Options Bar. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof. click to display masses.

12 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.15 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. select Core Face: Exterior. for Loc Line. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click roofs that you created. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click Wall by Face. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 22 In the Type Selector. click Modify to end the command. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. click to view only the walls and roofs. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 28 In the Type Selector. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click Curtain System by Face. 26 Click to redisplay the masses.

31 Using the same technique. 32 On the View toolbar.30 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.

Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Roof by Face. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and on the Options Bar. click Curtain System. click Create System.35 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and select it. and on the Options Bar.

Below the right corner of the view. 42 On the View toolbar.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. and select the mass face shown below. under Floor Plans. click to view the building that you have created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. specify a point to place the camera. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Camera.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. roofs. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. as shown. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . to view only the walls. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point for the camera target. click your building in the view. 48 On the View toolbar. Click the frame to display its grips.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created.

52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. click . 50 On the Options Bar. click Modify. for Justification. Under Grid 1 Pattern. select Center.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Click OK.

60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D View 1. and move the roof edges as shown below. double-click {3D}. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 56 In the Project Browser. click Door. 63 In the Type Selector. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Cancel to end the command. 55 Right-click. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

and they are not windows. To change grids. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. Like walls. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. and mullions. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to select a panel. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 525 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. panel.rvt. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. to resize the system. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. and you can change these elements individually. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. grid lines. To switch panel types. For example. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you select the grid. Unlike windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. This affects the entire curtain system. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. Like windows. you need to change the length of the wall.

expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and double-click Ground Floor. click Wall. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.1 In the Project Browser.

8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). enter 1200. top and base attachments. top constraint. and room bounding. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.11 Select the curtain system. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Click OK. For Top Offset. using curtain grids. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.

16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Curtain Grid. right-click Elevation 1 . click Elevation.a. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 25 On the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 20 In the drawing area. click Modify. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename.

33 On the Design Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. and click OK. click Curtain Grid. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. while pressing CTRL. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click to create a vertical grid. Click to place another grid line. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. select SECOND FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Modify. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. SIXTH FLOOR.26 While pressing CTRL. THIRD FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel.

37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and on the Options Bar.Next. The two segments are removed. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Creating an Entrance | 531 . and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then select the segment above it. click Add or Remove Segments. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.

532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them.38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 42 Place dimensions as shown.

46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Use the following image as a guide. click in any white space to exit the editor. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 43 Delete the dimensions. Creating an Entrance | 533 . You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

56 In the Project Browser. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click Training Files. This changes the graphics style of the Next. on the new curtain system you added. click Modify. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click view. The panel changes to a double door. . These panels schedule as doors. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans.rfa. Now.Next. under Elevations. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 52 On the Type Selector. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. double-click Entrance Elevation. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 55 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. not as curtain panels. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 54 On the Design Bar. 57 On the View Control Bar. They are part of the curtain panel category.

click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 63 Click OK twice. and the solid panels display in white. click System Panel : Solid. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The glazed panels display in blue. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 65 On the View Control Bar. Creating an Entrance | 535 .60 On the Type Selector. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.68 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. select Entire Grid Line. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Mullion. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Save As. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. select Grid Line Segment.

12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments.6 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . You are going to change some mullion joins. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 Delete the mullions below them. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. clickModify. because their width reduces the size of the doors. there are a few that you do not want. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. so you remove them next. however. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors.

you can also right-click. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 14 Click the top mullion control. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. double-click Southeast Isometric. 17 Save the file. click Modify. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. Finally. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids.Two mullion join controls display.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Wall. 1 In the Project Browser. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . (Arc passing through three points). Finally. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. enter 1200. For Top Offset. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Top Constraint.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Click OK.

14 In the Project Browser.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. eighths. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. you place grids on the system. You are going to use one of these snaps points. double-click East. Divide the halves into quarters. click Curtain Grid. and then sixteenths. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Next. under Elevations.

300mm. to filter out all 19 Save the file. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. select Basic Wall: Generic . you change some panels in the system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 18 In the Type Selector. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. select the bottom layer of panels.15 Zoom in to the cylinder.

under Elevations. for Depth. click Lines. 3 In the Project Browser. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Model Lines. click . 5 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.rft. enter 100. 9 Select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. double-click Exterior. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. select Glass. and click . 6 On the Options Bar. clear Chain. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 On the Design Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.

Pattern. select Curtain Panel . All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .rfa. and save the family as Curtain Panel .Pattern.Pattern. click (Default 3D View). 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. (SteeringWheels).14 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. click 25 On the View toolbar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. All fourth floor panels are selected. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.rfa family. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. and click Change Walls Orientation. click Modify. right-click. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and return to the project file. 23 Right-click. 21 In the Type Selector.

28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fifth floor panels are selected. 30 Save the file. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. right-click. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . All the panels change to the solid panel. 27 In the Project Browser.Solid. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Type Selector. select System Panel . double-click FIFTH FLOOR. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.

. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Select Radius. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. under Elevations. click Lines. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Click again to specify the ending point. click Training Files. click Mullion. enter 8. click ■ ■ For Sides. and select it. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel.rft. select Mullion. for Profile Usage. For vertical mullions.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click East. 8 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. and enter 50 mm for the radius.

rfa. and click Visibility. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.rfa family. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 Select the detail component.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Training Files. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and return to the project file. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. it can be added as a mullion type. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click OK. clear Coarse and Medium. click Visibility. and click OK.detail.rfa. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 17 On the Design Bar. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 31 Click . 13 On the Options Bar. After the new profile is loaded. clear Fine. click Mullion. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. under 3D Views. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify. click Detail Component. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 28 On the View toolbar.

42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select All Empty Segments.32 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Under Construction. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 33 Click Edit/New. 40 On the Design Bar. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. click Duplicate. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 44 Save the file. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. so you remove the unwanted ones. for Profile. select Circular Mullion for Family. right-click. 37 Click OK twice. and click OK. under Floor Plans. You have placed more mullions than you want. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 43 Press DELETE. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion.

548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar. and a ruled curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. under Floor Plans. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. a storefront system. 5 On the Options Bar.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and you can click to select them all. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 1 In the Project Browser. make custom curtain panels and mullions. and press TAB. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Pick Walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls. In this lesson. select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. under 3D Views. Click OK. click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 10 In the Project Browser. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. enter 600. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof.7 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family.

select Unconnected for Height. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Storefront System In this exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and enter 2400. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. under Floor Plans. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector.

8 Click the temporary dimension. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 12 Select the storefront wall. click Edit/New. Storefront System | 551 . 10 In the Project Browser. even if the wall height changes. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. under 3D Views. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. and click . double-click Southeast Isometric. which is specified in the type. 9 On the Design Bar. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and press ENTER. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. enter 10200 mm. For this wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click Modify. This specifies an exact length for the wall.

double-click Southeast Isometric. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. select All Empty Segments. click Mullion. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Justification. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. In this exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. and Offset. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. see the Revit Architecture help. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select a curtain grid. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you find Number. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. center. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. or end. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 16 Click OK. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 20 Save the file. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Angle. enter 15. By setting the Angle value. under 3D Views.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall.

Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.3 On the View Control Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line.

but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the panel. 9 On the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.8 Select the highlighted line. click Modify. and click . A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 11 Click OK. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. click Curtain Grid. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Next.

18 Save the file.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. quarters. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and then eighths. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. and then eighths. select System Panel : Solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and define a ruled curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. Finally. embed a curtain system inside another wall. quarters. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . right-click.

556 .

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. You do not need to create the work plane. Before you can sketch the roof profile. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. gable. you learn how to add fascia. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this tutorial. shed.rvt. In this lesson. 557 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. including hip. click Training Files. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In this exercise. In addition.Roofs 15 In this lesson. mansard. and soffits to the roofs that you create. and open Metric\m_Roofs. gutters. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and low sloped roofs.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and so on). To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 4 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. centerline. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click the blue square on the witness line. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click Ref Plane. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. expand Views (all). and click OK. select Name. expand Floor Plans.1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 13 On the Options Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.Next. sketch the roof profile. select Chain. click Lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

press CTRL. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 18 Select the edge of the roof. press TAB. 19 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The roof should resemble the following illustration. click Modify. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Sections (Type 1). and double-click Section 1. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and select the second wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.24 On the Options Bar. click model. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

3 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Views (all). and double-click Garage Roof. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. expand Floor Plans. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. and click Yes. sketch the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. Next.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.

under Dimensions. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click the model. 11 Press CTRL. By default. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. 15 On the View toolbar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select both slope definition lines. click Modify. Next. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 When you see the informational dialog. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click (Properties). click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line.

and double-click Level 3.rvt. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . When you complete the roof. 3 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 1 In the Project Browser. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. clear Defines slope. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. and enter 600 for Overhang.

select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 9 Using automatic snaps. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click (Rectangle). 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 Click to select all the walls. click Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Next. 10 On the View menu. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. select Defines Slope. sketch the chimney opening. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.

and double-click Level 2. click Pick Walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select Defines slope. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.18 On the View toolbar.

select the left vertical slope definition line. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 9 On the Tools toolbar. and click (Pick Lines). Next. clear Defines Slope. Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines. using the following illustration for guidance. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. close the roof sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house.

14 Under Constraints. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . click Roof Properties. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (SteeringWheels).

Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house.21 Click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 23 On the Tools toolbar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.

click Pick Walls. and enter 300 for Overhang.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.rvt. click (Trim/Extend). expand Views (all). 8 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. enter 0 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. select the left vertical roof line. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 6 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and double-click Level 2. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. click 20 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 Under Constraints. and press ENTER. expand 3D Views.rvt. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add a slope-defining line. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. expand Views (all). 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. and double-click 3D. click Modify. select Defines slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click Roof Properties. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

14 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. and double-click Level 2. click (Pick Lines). you need to add two reference planes. clear Defines Slope. expand Views (all). Next. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Before you can add slope arrows. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 5 On the View menu.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. To help locate the position of each split. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. add two new slope arrows. and enter 600 for Offset. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 9 On the Tools menu. click Split Walls and Lines. click Modify. click Ref Plane. Next. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Slope Arrow.

select Slope for Specify. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 18 Press CTRL. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Garage Roof. click Edit. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. m_Roofs. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. (Properties). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click OK. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. When eave heights differ. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. expand Floor Plans. 16 Repeat steps 13 . enter 500 for Rise/1000. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. and click 19 Under Constraints. and move the cursor to place the arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.rvt. the adjacent eave heights must align. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. select both slope arrows. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 20 Under Dimensions.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Views (all). click Modify.

When aligning eaves. 14 If you want to save your changes. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the File menu. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click Finish Roof. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 12 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. click Align Eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. Next. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click Save As. 5 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. select a method to align the eaves. (Properties). 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.

click Modify. (Properties). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 3 Select the roof and. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.rvt. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. expand Elevations. and double-click North. under Constraints.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. and then select Defines slope. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . Next. click Modify. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . expand Floor Plans. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.6 On the View toolbar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Lines. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 10 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.

NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click mansard roof.17 On the View toolbar. click Save As. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. After you add the roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. you add a roof to a building shell. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Training Files. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 .Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof. 5 In the drawing area. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click Pick Walls. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar.

Because the walls are not continuous. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Roof Properties.EPDM. select Steel Truss . for Type. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Insulation on Metal Deck . and click OK. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

16 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. double-click the section head to open the section view. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. click (Draw Split Lines). but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. The roof has been created. and click to select it.

and select a point on the opposite roof line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 18 Move the cursor down.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method.

exact placement of the points is not important. In this exercise. (Add points). click (Modify Sub-Elements). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. on the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. 23 On the Options Bar. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . Next.

Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. for the dimension. 25 Using the same method. click (Modify Sub-Elements). and press ENTER. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. enter -2''.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 31 Select the roof slab.27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. and select all of the roof edges. click Modify. including the interior edges of the roof regions. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and press ENTER. 29 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. enter 4''.

In some cases this type of slope is desired. 35 Click OK 3 times. The entire slab is sloped. Creating Fascia. click Edit/New. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits on page 586.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and Soffits In this lesson. 36 View the results in the section view. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. gutters. for the Thermal/Air Layer. click Save As. select Variable. for Structure. Creating Fascia. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. By making the insulation layer variable. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. under Construction. Gutters. Gutters. and soffits. you learn how to create roof fascia. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. you can easily create its fascia. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. click Edit. After you create a roof. on the File menu.

click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 3 Press CTRL. click Duplicate. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. and click OK. under Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . click Training Files.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rfa. enter Built-up Fascia. click (Properties). 8 In the Name dialog.

c_Condominium. Creating Gutters on page 588. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 2 On the Options Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click (Properties).

and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK three times. Creating Soffits on page 590.3 In the Properties dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. . under Construction. click in the Value field for Material. 10 Click to place the gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 589 . and click OK.

expand Views.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof. click Pick Roofs.

8 Select the roof. Creating Soffits | 591 . 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. click Join Geometry. 7 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Finish Sketch. and then select the soffit to join them.4 Select the roof.

click Save As.9 If you want to save your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu.

click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. select mm. select Millimeters. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. under Length. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. click Project Units. select Square meters. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. your values will be different.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. If you are using metric units. 593 . you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. In the final exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. For Unit Suffix. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Under Area. and open Common\c_Area. Finally. Click OK. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson.

6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Area Schemes tab. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click OK. These schemes define spatial relationships. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. the system-computed height defaults to the level. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. click Settings. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. select m2. 9 Click Cancel. select 2 decimal places. expand Floor Plans. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. expand Views (all). Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. and click Room and Area. click the Room Calculations tab. or 0. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .■ ■ ■ For Rounding. For Unit Suffix. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. it is not necessary in this exercise. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Click OK.

you must manually add these boundary lines.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). When you select Yes in this dialog. Click OK. rather than the area tag. 13 In the Project Browser. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area Plan. you must select one of the reference lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. click Area. 12 When the informational dialog displays. If you select No. under Views (all). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. To modify the area. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. forming a closed loop. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas.

Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. and store area. When you add area boundary lines. click Area Boundary. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Next. 21 On the Options Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Click OK. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you can either draw them or pick them. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. click Area Plan. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. When you pick the walls. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. If you do not select this option. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). common areas. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you create a new area plan for rentable space.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name.23 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. and click to select the area. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Area. click ■ ■ . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Select Office area for Area Type.

Click OK. click Area. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Select Office area for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog.■ Click OK. click Modify and select the area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 31 On the Design Bar. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click ■ ■ ■ . 29 On the Design Bar.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Store Area for Area Type.■ Click OK. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. enter Core for Name.

name the project Area-in progress. In the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. click Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. and click Save. 37 On the File menu. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .Notice that within the two store areas. click Color Scheme Legend. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click to place the legend.rvt. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.

click the Fields tab. select Areas (Rentable). 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. and click OK. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 7 Under Available fields.3 When the dialog displays. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Area Type and click Add.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and perimeter information. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you then need to update the building face. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. 603 . and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. or both.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. In this tutorial. floor. and roofs. After creating mass floors. After you make building elements. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. If you modify a massing face. roofs. curtain systems. volume. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. building elements. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and floors. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. floors. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. At any time. You assign the default wall.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. and cutting geometry. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Create Mass. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass. sweeps. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Training Files. and click Massing. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.rvt. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

click Lines. (Line). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. under Views (all). click the value for Material.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. enter 25000. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. (Pick Lines). 8 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. for Offset. under Materials and Finishes. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Materials dialog. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. select Mass (Opaque). enter 1550 mm. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. and on the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 15 On the View Control Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click . click 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click (Default 3D View). 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 13 On the View toolbar.

26 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. double-click {3D} to see the results. 28 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). highlight the larger form. click Extrusion Properties. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. press TAB to highlight the entire face. enter 25000. enter 27500. click the value for Material. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. for Name. for Extrusion End. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). double-click West. and click OK. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Constraints. for Extrusion Start. 30 In the drawing area. The second form is on top of the first form. 25 On the Design Bar. TIP If necessary. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click . 21 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). select Pick a plane.

click (Arc passing through three points). and click to select the line start point. and clear Chain. 34 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . and on the Options Bar. click (Draw).31 Click to select the face. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines).

double-click East. click (Move). (Line). click Modify. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.TIP If you do not see this option. 46 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 45 In the Project Browser. click Edit Top. click Lines and. and delete the vertical construction line. under Views (all). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 41 On the Edit toolbar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.

(Arc passing through three points). for Material. 53 On the View toolbar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 52 On the Design Bar. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. and click OK.48 On the Options Bar. click Blend Properties. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. click 49 Create an arc as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 50 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. click (Default 3D View).

When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Lines. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. m_Massing_Start. as shown. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options bar. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. double-click Level 1. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. select the mass. 2 In the drawing area. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 7 Using the same technique. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 9 On the Design Bar. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click Ref Plane.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. and select Chain. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. under Views (all). click (Line).

you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Click OK. In this exercise. 17 On the View toolbar. Using Swept Blends | 611 . When sketching each extrusion. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. click Extrusion Properties. 16 On the Design Bar. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 14 Under Constraints. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. enter 0. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. for Extrusion End. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. on the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click (Default 3D View). snap the corners to the intersections.

■ For the radius. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). click Sketch 2D Path. under Floor Plans. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 3 On the Design Bar. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. m_Massing_Start. and click Lines. select a point below the mass elements. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend.

and click Edit. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 6 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 .Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. click Lines. click (Rectangle). click Profile 1. The only way to align these elements is visually. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 11 On the Options Bar. as shown. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass.

and press ESC.13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. 17 Using the same method. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Profile 2.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Finish Profile. 15 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click (Align). sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.

click Finish Profile. select Mass (Transparent). Using Swept Blends | 615 . under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Swept Blend. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Swept Blend Properties.18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. and click . Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click <By Category>. 22 Click OK twice. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

616 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then load that mass family file and others into a project.24 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.rvt. Finally. In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click Finish Mass. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.

you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 11000 mm. In this exercise. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. 6 For Width. and click Apply. under Other. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa.rfa. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and for Name. and click Apply. enter 46000mm. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . click Family Types. click New. 7 Click New. and for Name. enter 18000 mm. for Height. enter 12000 mm. 9 Click OK. and click OK. and click OK. enter 15000mm. click Training Files. for Width. and click Apply. 8 For Width. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 5 Click New. enter 6000 mm. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Depth. for Depth. for Depth. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Height. enter 9000 mm. for Height. enter 18000 mm. enter 68000 mm.

rfa. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. Arc Dome. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 6 Open the Box-Training. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 1 If not already selected.rvt. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. double-click Site. on the View toolbar. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. You also load other existing mass families and place them.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. under Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Place Mass. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . as shown.rfa. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa family files.rfa. Semi Barrel Vault. 8 In the Type Selector. and Triangle. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.

select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 25 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. and click (Element Properties). 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. enter 90 for Angle. specify Mass (Transparent). 24 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 11 Select the box. 21 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice.10 On the Design Bar. select the triangle. 17 Press CTRL. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. click Modify. and click to place the mass. click Modify. select Rotate after placement. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. as shown. 14 In the Type Selector. click (Element Properties). select the 3 boxes. and on the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. 23 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. 33 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Opaque).26 Select the triangle. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK twice. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click (Default 3D View). for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent).

NOTE When you join geometry. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. In this exercise. you join these mass elements.rvt file. (Join Geometry). you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 .Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.

on the Edit toolbar. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click (Mirror). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and then select the triangle. click (Default 3D View). 17 Press ESC to see the result. enter SM. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click (Draw). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. for Axis.8 On the Options Bar. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. as shown. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. (Join Geometry). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.

The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. (If Design Options is already selected. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click Modify. do not clear the check mark. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. and select the triangle mass element. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.rvt. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click (Add to Design Option Set). you joined mass elements together.In this exercise.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. 1 On the Design Bar. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .

select Sloped (primary). Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. under Views (all). select Rotate after placement. enter 90. 10 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. clear Curved. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. for Angle. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 17 In the Type Selector. 14 In the drawing area. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). under Floor Plans. specify Mass (Transparent). select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H.

21 In the Element Properties dialog. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 22 In the Project Browser. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for the Material parameter. double-click North. under Elevations. 19 On the Design Bar.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. TIP To find the correct shapes. double-click {3D}. While pressing CTRL. 28 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. select Curved. and watch the status bar. under Views (all). specify Mass (Transparent). select the three arc domes. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. under Views (all). and click OK. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. click (Add to Design Option Set). and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. clear Sloped.

31 Click the value for Design Option. under Option. 35 On the File menu.rvt. 34 Close the warning that displays. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. and click Close. you placed mass elements into Design Options. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. In this exercise. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. select Curved and. click (Design Options). You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 33 In the Design Options dialog.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click Make Primary. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you can make it the primary option. and click OK.

select Wall Centerline.Brick on CMU. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View toolbar. and for Loc Line. you pick massing faces to create walls. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 6 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. 5 In the Type Selector.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.rvt. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. click (Pick Faces). 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 15 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. double-click Level 3. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Views (all). 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.

20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). you can select the overlapping curtain wall. double-click Level 9. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. If desired.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

and click OK. double-click {3D}. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. volume. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. clear Curtain Panels. Curtain Systems.rvt. under Views (all). 4 Click OK. click Modify. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 6 On the Options Bar. and Walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. When you select levels. 1 In the Project Browser. click Mass Floors. 8 On the Design Bar. and exterior surface area. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass.In this exercise. perimeter. select all levels. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab.

10 Press CTRL. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. select Levels 1-4. click Modify. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. click Mass Floors. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 11 On the Options Bar.

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). 15 Press CTRL. 16 On the Options Bar. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog.14 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. select Level 1. click Mass Floors. and click OK.

and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). and select Level. and click Add. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and click OK. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Category. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. press and hold SHIFT. under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Floor Area. select Floor Area. Floor Volume. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors.In this exercise.rvt. Floor Perimeter. select Mass Floor. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 4 Using the same method.

NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Usage. enter Retail. and click OK. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. select Mass: Family and Type. for Sort by.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Select Level. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Other. 13 With Usage selected. under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Remove.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. After you assign usage. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Properties. for Fields. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. click Edit. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing.

and click OK. under Other. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 24 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Filter tab. and in the field below. 27 Click OK twice. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. and select Grand totals.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Field formatting. enter Hotel. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. in the field under Filter by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). select Usage. for Sort by. and click OK. under Other. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . for Filter by. and plan views. 23 In the Rename View dialog. elevation. click Edit. 16 On the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. under Fields. for Filter. click Edit. 19 Click OK twice. select Usage. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Level. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Then by. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Floor Area.

rvt. click Roof by Face. floor perimeter. the floor area. under Views (all). you created mass floor schedules. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. you pick massing faces to create roofs. double-click {3D}. The mass floor schedules list. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. by level. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar.400mm. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic .

640 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Create Roof. Curtain Systems. 12 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. and Walls. and click OK. 13 Using the same method. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass.8 Using the method you just learned. select Sloped Glazing. select Curtain Panels. In this exercise. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.

3 In the Type Selector. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create System. 5 Press CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method.9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .12 Click Modify to exit the command.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Curtain Panels. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. and Walls. click Modify. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu. double-click Site. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 6 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). clear Exclude Design Options. and then click OK. and click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. under Floor Plans. Roofs. 3 On the Model Categories tab. enter 30000. click Visibility/Graphics. and click (Element Properties). Floors. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 .1 In the Project Browser. for Width. Next.

10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans.

press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 .TIP To select the curtain wall. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click Remake. click OK. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also. 17 Select the roof as shown. you want to select the smaller one. click (Default 3D View).

click Remake. and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

20 In the Project Browser. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

650 | Chapter 17 Massing . click All to select all categories. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 9 Select Mass.Massing only. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Model Categories tab. right-click {3D}. 4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.

you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial. You might create the model shown.In this exercise. to the building shell. If desired. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

652 .

you not only simplify their placement. 653 . In this exercise. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Modifying. you add the new model group to a previously created group. the host group is also updated automatically. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and typical office layouts. After you create a model group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. In this tutorial. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. For example. Creating. or with those working on a different project. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. You mirror one instance of the group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you also simplify the modification process. and modify repetitive units. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. In another exercise. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you make changes to a nested group. hotel rooms. The new group is considered nested within the host group. all instances in the building model are updated. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You can also nest groups within other groups. place. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. By grouping objects.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and double-click First Floor. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). enter ZR. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.

and click OK. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 .

7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin.

expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 .Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser.

clear Copy. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror).

click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. as shown. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. one mirrored. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated.

rvt. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group | 661 . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you finish editing. and click Save. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. click Save As. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

4 Move the cursor over the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member. NOTE To display an excluded element. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the element.). 8 On the Design Bar.). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door. press TAB. and click member to group instance. click Modify.

127mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 10 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 13 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 663 . click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . move the cursor to the left. 14 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. click Wall.

Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. In edit group mode. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 21 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. move the cursor up.17 On the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 23 In the drawing area. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.

click Finish. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 26 Select the opening. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups In this exercise. (Element Properties). created in an earlier lesson. and click OK. Nesting Groups | 665 . click 28 For Base Offset. click Modify. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. which acts as the host. under Constraints. enter 1000. enter 2134. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. for Unconnected Height.25 On the Design Bar.

select the Typical Kitchen group. 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click Edit Group. under Floor Plans. click (Add to Group). 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. in the Project Browser. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.

Nesting Groups | 667 . click Finish. 7 On the group editor toolbar. and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as text. In the next exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. such as door and window tags. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. under Floor Plans. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. you add door tags to a group.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. click Filled Region. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click to draw a rectangular region. click Finish Sketch.

The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and on the Design Bar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click (Group). select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click Text.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and select the text note and the filled region. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. and click OK. click to add an arc leader. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 In the drawing area. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown.

Because the detail group contains variables. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. under Groups. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Modify. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . double-click Second Floor. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. as shown. double-click First Floor. click Modify.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. clear Leader.manner that a drawing component can be added. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 9 On the Edit toolbar. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and click OK.7 On the Options Bar. select Door Tags. click (Group). 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser.

select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Modify. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 On the Design Bar.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Place Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. therefore. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. and click OK. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.

Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Save Group. 3 For File name. expand Groups. and click OK. select 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Groups\Model. 12 On the Design Bar. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . verify that Same as group name is selected. accept the default template file. and click Create Instance. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Open. verify that Project is selected. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click OK.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save. click Modify. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. In this case. browse to the Desktop. and expand Model. for Create new. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. A warning dialog displays.rvt. click Desktop.

and the link is removed.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 18 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing. and click OK. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the linked Revit model. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. and on the Options Bar.rvt. When a group is converted to a link. click Training Files.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Revit Links. 20 On the Options Bar. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Remove Link. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Modify. verify that Attached Details is selected only. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Bind. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

and then modify the data. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Using Site Tools In this lesson. islands. In the final exercises.Site 19 In this tutorial. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. convert the data to a table. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. 677 . You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you add a building pad to the site. You add property lines manually. and walkways.

you create a toposurface using two different methods. and double-click Site.rvt. This project file was created using the default metric template. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. click Training Files. Using the first method. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. In the second part of this exercise. and open Metric\m_First_Project. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Toposurface. click Point. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Site. 4 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

and click OK. enter 1500mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. click Site Settings. 12000mm. 11 On the Design Bar. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Additional Contours.8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Surface. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Increment. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12 On the Settings menu. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 15000mm.

enter 1000mm. 14 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. modify the level names and elevations. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click to delete it. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and double-click South. click Modify. and press ENTER. on the Standard toolbar. under Views (all). 15 On the View Control Bar. Before importing the contour data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click the elevation value. click to view it at various angles. Creating a Toposurface | 681 .

click Modify. double-click Site. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Pin Position. Verify that Current view only is not selected. click Training Files. and click OK. rename the level Base Site Elevation. click Yes. For Layers. and press ENTER.21 Click the Level 2 text. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. under Floor Plans. 29 Select the imported topography. and press ENTER. rename the level Basement. under Views (all). it is considered an import symbol. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Until it is exploded. 24 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. select Specify. 28 On the Design Bar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Preserve. Click Open. For Colors. 30 On the Edit menu.

Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 32 On the View menu. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear Elevations. 34 Under Visibility. click Modify. clear C_INDX. click Visibility/Graphics. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. and then click OK. select it. click the Annotation Categories tab. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. when the edges highlight. click Toposurface.31 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. When you select the import symbol.

43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. 42 On the View toolbar. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 39 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 40 On the View toolbar.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. name the project Site-in progress. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you add property lines using two methods.rvt. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Using the second method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click (Default 3D View). 684 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding Property Lines on page 684. Using the first method. this project file is required in its current state. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. Site-in progress. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.rvt. do so before continuing. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Lines. Select and delete the right vertical line. under Floor Plans. Click Modify. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. select Create property lines by sketching. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. and click OK. Adding Property Lines | 685 . click Property Line.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state.

686 | Chapter 19 Site . A warning dialog is displayed. add an arc line on the right.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. when they highlight. 6 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. select the lines. select Edit Table. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Property Line. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click 12 On the Design Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 9 In the warning dialog. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. to delete them. click OK.

16 Click OK. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. This means there is no gap in the property lines. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click to place the property lines. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tags dialog.14 In the Property Lines dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. Adding Property Lines | 687 . If the gap is not closed. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 15 Starting in Row #1. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed.

31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 On the View Control Bar. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.20 Click Load. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click the Imported Categories tab. right-click in the Design Bar. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. click to place it. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Tag ➤ By Category. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click Training Files. clear Leader. 23 On the View menu. 22 In the Tags dialog. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. and click OK. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 25 Under Visibility. this project file is required in its current state. In the next exercise.rfa. and click Drafting. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.dwg and click OK. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. Before adding property line segment tags. you created two sets of property lines. 27 On the Options Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the final step.

Under Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. click New. select Dash dot. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. under Contour Line Display. and click OK. In the Object Styles dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Under Range Type. 10 Under Additional Contours. enter 1000. for Subcategory. Under Line Color.0mm. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 7 Click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. click Site Settings. Site-in progress. 2 On the Settings menu. select Working Contour. click Object Styles. select a shade of Brown. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.rvt. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. enter the name Working Contour. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Under Line Pattern. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Topography. select Single Value.

The next exercise requires a new training file. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. parking areas. In the next exercise. The object style subcategory. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.11 Click OK. and islands. Working Contour. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. In this exercise. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. such as material. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690.

and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click Subregion. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and open Metric\m_Site. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. try to replicate the location and proportion. 2 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Training Files. click Lines. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.

Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog.Tarmacadam for Name. under Identity Data. click Properties. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . 8 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. and click OK. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. enter Parking for Name. select Site . click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. they display within this schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 12 On the View Control Bar. As you create new subregions. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.9 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit Boundary. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.Tarmacadam. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and double-click Topography Schedule.

16 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. double-click Topography Schedule. click Lines. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. In this training project. Within each subregion. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the project area has increased. click Finish Sketch. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Subregion. under Schedules/Quantities. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Delete overlapping lines. 22 On the Design Bar.

click Properties. 26 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. enter Island . 29 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. 28 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . under Schedules/Quantities. and click to open the Materials dialog.Grass for Name. click Finish Sketch. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 30 In the Project Browser.23 In the upper-right parking area. select Site . and click OK. under Identity Data. double-click Topography Schedule. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

31 In the Project Browser. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.Grass. Name each region Island Grass. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . click Lines. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. Name the subregion Walkway. 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. click Subregion. and apply the material Site .walkway. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. You must sketch each region separately. Notice that the schedule has been updated. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 38 In the Project Browser. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. there is still only one toposurface. click Finish Sketch. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 37 On the Design Bar.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect.

Grading the Toposurface on page 698. 2 Select the toposurface. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . When you use the grading tool. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. under Floor Plans.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.

click Graded Region. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. select Copy Internal Points.3 On the Options Bar. Using Phasing on page 761. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . 8 Select the topographic surface. click (Element Properties). and click Select and Edit. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. see the tutorial. under Phasing. 6 On the Design Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. select Existing for Phase Created. and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Press DELETE. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

click Point. 18 On the View toolbar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click (Default 3D View). specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 19 On the View Control Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.13 Press DELETE. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Surface. 702 | Chapter 19 Site .

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Only the graded topography displays. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. specify Existing for Phase. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 24 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. this project file is required in its current state. you can delete it. only the original toposurface displays. you create a building pad. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. under Phasing. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. (SteeringWheels). 25 In the Element Properties dialog. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and click OK.20 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click View Properties. specify New Construction for Phase. and click OK. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. click View Properties. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Therefore. When you add a building pad. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. click to view it at various angles. 23 Select the toposurface. and delete it. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Adding a Building Pad | 703 .

6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . If you have an existing building model. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Lines. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Site tutorial-in progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. double-click Site. click Pad. NOTE By default. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 7 On the View Control Bar. Notice the new building pad. this project file is required in its current state. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Site Components on page 706. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 9 On the View toolbar.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Adding Site Components In this exercise. click Modify. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Parking Component.90 deg. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. and select the parking space. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.rvt. under Floor Plans.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Adding Site Components | 707 .NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

Notice the new parking spaces. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 12 In the Type Selector. click (SteeringWheels).9 On the View toolbar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . choose any tree type. click Site Component. double-click Site.

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Adding Site Components | 709 . Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (Default 3D View). In the following illustration. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 15 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Tag All Not Tagged. this project file is required in its current state. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. and click Apply. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Hidden Line. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. and click OK. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. under Floor Plans. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 5 On the View menu. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Apply. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.

add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. 8 On the Options Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. to position the shoulder of the leader. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Click up and to the left. In the following exercise. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. outside of the site. as shown: 10 Using the same method. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click again to the left to position the leader. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . you create a parking schedule.■ Clear Leader. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. this project file is required in its current state. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

Site tutorial-in progress. number the first three spaces consecutively. and under Heading.rvt. 5 Under Available fields. 7 Under Fields. 4 Under Available fields. click Close Hidden Windows. and click Add. select Mark. click Schedule/Quantities. and under Heading. enter Size. 8 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. select Type. 13 In the Parking Schedule. select Mark. double-click Site. 9 On the Window menu. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . click the Fields tab. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Tile. and click Add. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. under Space. 6 Click the Formatting tab.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. If necessary. enter Space. The parking schedule is displayed. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 12 In the Site plan. under Views (all). select Type. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Window menu. and click OK. select Parking for Category.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space.

716 .

are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. however. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. A workset is a collection of building elements. you specify an active workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Using Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. and so on. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. After the project is shared. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can enable Worksharing for any project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. Working in a shared project In a shared project. stairs. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. such as walls. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. doors. use Element Borrowing. In this tutorial. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. called Worksharing. To make a workset editable. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. All other team members can view this workset. such as annotations and dimensions. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. go to the Worksets dialog. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. select the desired workset. and click Editable. you must first enable Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. When you are working on a shared project. Elements specific to a view. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. floors.

greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. and View worksets. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. In the lessons and exercises that follow. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In the next exercise. Instead. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. In a multi-story structure. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. such as a tenant interior. not including the Project Standards. Experience has shown that.dialog. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . for a typical project. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In most projects. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. After learning the fundamentals. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Shared Levels and Grids. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You should have at least one workset for each person. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When setting up Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.

the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset.Team member roles Typically. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. each team member has control over a portion of the design. As new members create worksets for their own use. Regardless of the default setting. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. On this tab. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. When creating the new worksets. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. For example. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. When you create a new workset. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. designers work in teams.

within the local file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. however. As you work. your changes propagate to the entire team.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. your changes are saved. you should then save to your local file.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. proceeds as usual. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. This makes them available to other team members. Therefore. When finished or at regular intervals. When you save to the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Generally. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save locally (to your local file). On the Options Bar. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. After saving to the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you make that workset editable by you. This is called “Selective Open. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. When you save to the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . However. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you can select which workset is active. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. the file is saved as the central file.

Alternatively. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you work no differently then you would in the office. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. make any required worksets editable. In this situation. In this instance. reload the latest changes from the central file. save to the central file. and then save the local file. for instance. if you know who checked out the required workset. and make that workset editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In this conceptual exercise. In the next exercise. you should check out the Materials workset. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . To do this. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. using VPN. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. When working remotely. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file.

and notice all are editable by you. click Worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Your username displays as the present owner. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. 3 In the Worksets dialog. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. The Worksets dialog displays.rvt. and open Common\c_Worksets. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. When you enable worksharing. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. under Show. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Training Files. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

select any of the exterior walls of the building model. click New. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 17 On the Options Bar. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. In this case. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. imagine four users including yourself. you can rename the default workset. 8 Click OK. however.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. type the name Exterior Shell. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. Therefore. under Identity Data. 16 In the drawing area. it is better to make them visible by default. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. currently named Workset1. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 12 Click Rename. and double-click Level 1. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 13 In the Rename dialog. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. You do. 9 Click New. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and Views. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. another is assigned the interior layout. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Project Standards. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. and click OK. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. clear Families. expand Floor Plans. For example. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. ■ 5 Under Show. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . In this training file. a small number of team members are working on the building model. For training purposes. In this simple training project. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. click . a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 14 In the Worksets dialog. clear Visible by default in all views. Only User-Created worksets should display. expand Views (all). furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. select Workset1.

29 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 20 Select one of the interior walls. under Identity Data. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. and click OK. stairs. select Interior Layout for Workset. including the interior doors. 24 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data.19 Click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and walls. click . 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 26 On the View menu. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

34 In the drawing area. 39 Click Save. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Now that you have created the central file.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 30 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Views (all). This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click . double-click Level 2. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. In this exercise. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 33 In the Project Browser. 43 Click OK. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Visibility/Graphics. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. under Identity Data. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 32 Select Interior Layout. 44 On the File menu. click Close. click Save As. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 38 In the Save As dialog. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click Non Editable. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 42 On the right side of the dialog. under Floor Plans. If any interior elements remain. 35 On the Options Bar. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Worksets. and click OK. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

11 In the Worksets dialog. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Next. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 2 In the Open dialog. and select Specify. you create your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 12 Click OK. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 7 In the Save As dialog. make modifications to the building model. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). check out worksets. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Before working on the model. please do so before continuing. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 13 On the Window menu. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Save As. 15 In the Project Browser. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. You have created a local file which is for your use only. select Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 6 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. click Worksets. and click Save. and click OK. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. In addition. click Open. and select Yes for Editable. expand Floor Plans. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Interior Layout for Name. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. In this case. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 4 Click Open. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select the central file.

click . the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Because this element is not owned by another user. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. you can still edit this wall. click Worksets. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 24 Click OK. and click OK. In the Worksets dialog. 22 Click OK. If it was owned by another user. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click . 23 On the File menu. however. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. notice the Editable Only option. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. under Identity Data. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . If this is selected. 20 Under Constraints. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. On the Options Bar. In this case. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. Verify that it is cleared. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog.

34 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Door. The precise location is not important. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). 31 On the Design Bar. click Wall. click Modify. 26 Delete the door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.

you should relinquish all worksets. and save locally immediately afterward. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. add two door openings into the rooms you created. a tooltip. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. displays the workset as well as the element type. please do so before continuing. it is recommended. In this exercise. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. You modified the building model. When working in your local file. you should perform regular saves. make elements editable. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Throughout the process. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. two users access the central file through a network connection. and reload the latest changes. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Borrowed Elements is selected. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. each user must check out worksets. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Whenever you save. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. checked out worksets. In this particular case. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you created your local file.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. By default. leave this file open in its current state. In addition. At the end of a work session. save to central. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. click Save to Central. For training purposes.

14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. click Worksets.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You now have a local copy of the project.rvt. and proceed to Creating a local copy. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 11 On the File menu. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. consider that person to be User 1. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 15 On the File menu. This file is for your use only. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Options. and click OK. For training purposes. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. one user has already created a local file. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and click Save. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 3 On the Settings menu. and select Specify. instructions are staggered. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 7 In the Open dialog. 12 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. enter User 2. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. In addition. return to the Settings dialog. click Save As. click Open. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced. skip the following section. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. click Options. select all the User-Created worksets. User 2: Create a local file. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. under Username. select the central file. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 9 Click Open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).

click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . If it is not open. 27 On the File menu. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. If you only have one workset checked out. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 1: Check out worksets. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. it becomes the active workset. 17 Click OK. expand Views (all).” 29 Click OK. select the lower exterior wall. click Worksets. modify the building model. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. open it now. 24 In the Project Browser.You are now the owner of that workset. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. 23 Click OK. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 19 On the File menu. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and double-click Level 1. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. expand Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.

The changes User 2 made are apparent. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser. 37 On the File menu. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. However. click Reload Latest. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. When you save to central. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . User 1: Reload latest worksets. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. Before adding any furniture. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans. 46 In the Project Browser.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. click Worksets. right-click Level 1. and click Rename.” 39 Click OK. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 41 On the File menu. under Views (all). click Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK.” 35 Click OK. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Click Yes. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 33 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view.

53 On the File menu. 66 On the File menu. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. are placed under Project Standards. NOTE System families. 60 In the Rename dialog. under Show. and click inside any room. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. such as Wall Types. click Component. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 48 In the Type Selector. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 50 On the View menu. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. rather than Families. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 62 On the File menu. select Project Standards. choose any desk. click Edit/New. the Visible by default option was not selected. Therefore. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK.200mm.” 55 Click OK. click Modify.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. click Save to Central. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. enter Exterior Wall . A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. and click OK. click Worksets. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. click Rename. click the Worksets tab. 65 Click OK. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 61 Click OK 2 times. click Visibility/Graphics. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 54 In the Save to Central dialog.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select Save to Central. Each user checked out worksets. and click OK. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. select the following. select Reload Latest. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Each user must have network access to the central file. Checking out worksets. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. This exercise requires two users and. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. 3 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. throughout this training. 70 On the File menu. finished the previous workset exercises. At the appropriate point in this exercise. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. In subsequent steps. leave this file open in its current state. click Save As. and these problems are rectified. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. and published their changes back to the central file. you save the training file as a central file. click Training Files. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. There are specific instructions for each user. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and still have your local files open. User 1: Reload latest.rvt. modified the building model. In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Options. As each of you work. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and save 69 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).

WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 In the Save As dialog. Set the Username to User 2. 5 Click Save. click Open. click Save As. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. select Make this a Central File after save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. In addition. select the central file. click Options. and click Save. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. and click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 15 Click Open. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . and click Save. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click OK. 12 On the File menu. and select Specify. 6 On the File menu. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. return to the Settings dialog. 17 On the File menu. The central file should still be open. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Save As. 13 In the Open dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. On the Settings menu. 18 In the Save As dialog. This is a system setting. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Options. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. This is the local file for User 1.4 In the File Save Options dialog. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu.

32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. click the File menu. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. under Floor Plans. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. double-click Level 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. click Worksets. 30 On the left exterior wall. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . After you submit the request. and then click OK. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Open. 27 Under Active Workset. select the Interior Layout workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 22 In the Worksets dialog. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click Worksets. and click Editing Requests. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. You are now the owner of that workset. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select the second window from the top. Afterwards. At this point. select Interior Layout. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 24 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. select Exterior Shell. select them. 29 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 26 In the Worksets dialog.

User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . 36 Click Close. and notice the window is in the new location. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. select the following. select the request submitted by User 2. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Close. and close 39 On the File menu. select Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. click Check Now. 38 Click OK. 35 Click Grant.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and the other user granted it. In this case. to Local. you requested permission to edit the element.

738 .

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have multiple sets of design options. 739 . In addition. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client has asked you to create various options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. For example. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). Using design options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. After you and the client agree on the final design. In this tutorial.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. In this particular case. At any time in the design process. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. and each option set can have multiple schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.

and click Close. After you create a design option. 2 In the Design Options dialog. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Edit Selected. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Training Files. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. With the second option. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you can edit it. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you set up multiple design option sets. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you design each of the structural options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. and delete the unwanted options from the project. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Option Set. therefore. each with multiple design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. In the second exercise. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. make your final design decision.rvt. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). the only available command is to create a new option set.In the first exercise in this lesson. the roof and structure systems must work together. TIP In this exercise. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu.

the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. expand Views (all). 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. select: ■ ■ ■ . 11 On the Edit toolbar.4 In the Project Browser. In this case. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. click Column. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 7 In the Type Selector. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and the third column centered between the two. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. TIP To center the middle column. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. By selecting Multiple. click 12 On the Options Bar. add three columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. or add a dimension string between the columns. click Modify. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 9 On the Design Bar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. In the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction.

17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. Because of the size of the columns. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. When you are finished. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . A copy of the three selected columns is added. click . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.

21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. click Beam. under Floor Plans. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. select Round Bar : 50mm. Next. click Modify. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The second click specifies the end of the beam. you add the beams that span the columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Zoom in on the upper right column. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 23 On the Design Bar. In it. and click at its center to set the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE.

click 26 On the Options Bar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. and click the center point. click . 30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.

enter Roofing for New. click Rename. under Option Set. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. not a new option set. 43 In the Rename dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. enter Brackets for New. 46 Under Option. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. click New. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 37 Select Option 2 and. click New. under Option Set.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. enter Structure for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. 45 Under Roofing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. and click OK. enter Beam for New. click Rename. 41 Under Option Set. 34 In the Design Options dialog. name the option Louvers. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). click New.

name the option Sunscreen. 51 Under Edit. 52 Click Close. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Under Now Editing. 53 In the Project Browser. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Floor Plans.47 Under Roofing. and click OK. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Beam. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. you create the second design option. When finished. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 48 Under Option. select Option 2. under Structure. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 50 In the Design Options dialog. it will resemble the following illustration. click Rename. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Edit Selected.

The second click represents the plane that is moved. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 56 In the Type Selector. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Component. 58 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . click Align. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. select M_Roof Beam.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Refer to the following illustration.

61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . on the Edit toolbar. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. click Modify. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 66 On the View toolbar. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 67 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.rvt. name the file. click Finish Editing. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click . you need this file in its current state. 69 Click Close. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. and click Save. Notice that even before you close the dialog. which is visible by default. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 70 On the File menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Save As.

7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 3 In the Design Options dialog. Sunscreen. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. you design each of the roofing options. If you need to add dimensions. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 5 Click Close. 4 Under Edit. click Component. under Roofing. each with multiple design options to pick from. Under Now Editing.In this exercise. The first option. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. select Louvers (primary). expand Views (all). click Edit Selected. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 6 In the Project Browser. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. delete them after the rafter is in place. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 10 Referring to the following illustration. expand Floor Plans.rvt. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. In the next exercise. With the second option. 8 In the Type Selector. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. open it now. The second roofing system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. the other for beams. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. a Louver system. 2 On the Tools menu. do so now. you set up multiple design option sets. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Array. Enter 5 for Number. 13 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click .11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Modify. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 11750 mm for Length. Select Constrain. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. and click OK. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 15 On the Edit menu.

when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. and click Array. click Modify. enter 5475 mm for Length. click . click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 25 With the louver still selected. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 22 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click the Edit menu. 20 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and select the louver you just placed. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Component. 26 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. 27 For the array starting point. Enter 34 for Number. Select Constrain. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 .

29 On the View toolbar. enter 300. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press Enter. and. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. click .28 Move the cursor vertically downward. when the listening dimension displays.

Therefore. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 39 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 40 On the Options Bar. and then click Close. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. click Finish Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. In this case. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 30 On the Tools menu. click Edit Selected. Click OK. and double-click West. click Lines. 33 Under Editing. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. and click OK. 31 In the Design Options dialog.The louver roof system is complete. under Edit. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . select Sunscreen. 34 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. under Roofing.

49 On the View toolbar. then the center arc. 45 Click OK. Under Constraints.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 43 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. and the third point defines the arc. You will fix this in a later step. click . 48 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The first two points define the ends of the line. The arcs should connect. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. click Properties. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . then you can modify it through the dimension. the top of the next column on the right. click Finish Sketch. click Trim/Extend. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 46 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. Select the right arc. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 41 Select the top of the left column.

3 In the Rename View dialog. After exploring the combinations. click Finish Editing. make it part of the building model.The louver roof system is complete. The first option. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and then click Close. you need this file in its current state. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The second roofing system. expand 3D Views. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. 51 In the Design Options dialog. under 3D Views. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 52 On the File menu. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Managing Design Options | 757 . NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 50 On the Tools menu. under Views (all). and click OK. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. In this exercise. right-click {3D}. do so now. Managing Design Options In this exercise. secondary. a Louver system. you select a design. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. enter Primary Option. and last options. Sunscreen. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. you designed each of the roofing options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. under Views (all). and click Duplicate. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under Edit. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 2 In the Project Browser. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. tertiary. and delete the discarded design options. 4 In the Project Browser. click Save. and click Rename.

and click Rename. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Primary Option. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View menu.5 Right-click each of the copies. 7 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. double-click Secondary Option. under Views (all). Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 19 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 15 On the View menu. under Views (all). Managing Design Options | 759 . the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. In this case. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In your design options. At this point. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. under Views (all). all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under 3D Views.

under Structure. Because the client has selected the design option. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 25 Select Structure. click Yes. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Save. but should be accepted as part of the building model. The set is deleted. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and deleted the discarded design options. made it part of the building model. the current primaries are no longer options. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Yes.22 On the Tools menu. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 24 Under Option. select Make Primary. click Close. since you no longer need them. double-click Primary Option. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Delete to remove the views that used options. you selected a design. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. This was the client choice for structural. the beam option becomes part of the model. After exploring the combinations. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Delete. 31 In the alert dialog. In this exercise. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. select Beam. 26 Under Option Set. 29 Select Roofing. 30 Under Option Set. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Accept Primary. An alert is displayed. 27 In the alert dialog. 35 On the File menu.

you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. and then add new building model elements. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. 761 . You create new phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. You create new phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. demolish existing walls and doors.Project Phasing 22 In any project. demolish existing construction. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. For the client. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. complete with schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases.

and open Common\c_Phasing. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. expand Views (all).rvt. 4 Click Cancel. click (Element Properties). 7 Click Cancel. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. click Project Units. regardless of phase. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. This means that all building model elements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Training Files. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. are visible in this view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. As you add new elements to the building model. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. define the units. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. and double-click Level 1. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. under Phasing. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. expand Floor Plans. When you create a new project.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. go to the Settings menu. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. During the demolition and renovation process. 6 On the Options Bar. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.

Because this is a phase-specific view.Demo. click Modify. 17 Click No. and click Rename. Phasing Your Model | 763 . it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. including the door tags. under Phasing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 11 In the Filter dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog. right-click Level 1. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. and click OK. all of the building model elements. Because this is a renovation project. 10 On the Options Bar.Existing. under Floor Plans. clear Door Tags. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. After you release the mouse button. and click Rename.Existing. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). are highlighted in red. 18 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 . you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 14 On the Design Bar. right-click Copy of Level 1 . select Existing. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. After you create the views. right-click Level 1 . and click OK. TIP If this were a multi-story building.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. under Floor Plans. for Phase Created. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level.Existing. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 . click .

This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. double-click Level 1 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 26 In the Phasing dialog. 28 Under Filter Name. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. There are five default phase filters. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. under Floor Plans. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. click the Phase Filters tab. under Floor Plans. You may need to zoom in to see this. and Temporary. and click OK. to which all the building model elements belong. double-click Level 1 . Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.Existing. Later in this exercise. select Overridden.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. select Existing. new construction occurs after existing construction. Because of this time relationship. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. under New. however. for Phase. On a logical time line. 24 In the Project Browser. Next. In this case. enter Composite Plan. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. under Phasing. Existing. 21 In the Project Browser. 27 Click New. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 29 For Composite Plan. Phase status is time-dependent.Demo. Demolished. you modify these settings.

Demo. click (Demolish). Phasing Your Model | 765 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. select Demolished. 34 In the Color dialog. you begin demolition. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. Next. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. click OK. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. under Cut ➤ Lines. click the value for Color. 42 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . select a lighter blue. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. When you demolish the host. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 35 Click OK twice.Existing. you demolish all elements hosted by it. or you can use the demolish tool. under Floor Plans. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. There are two ways to demolish an element. its display changes to a red dashed line. double-click Level 1 . select the interior walls one at a time. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.31 Under Phase Status. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select the line style. 32 In the Demolished row. 39 In the Phasing dialog. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. As you click each wall. 36 Using the same method. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. select red.

The demolished walls no longer display. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and click OK. 49 On the Design Bar. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".Existing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 In the Type Selector. add a long horizontal wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Show Previous + New. under Phasing. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Open Level 1 . 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. click Door. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall.Demo. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 47 In the Type Selector. for Phase Filter. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. and click OK.

Demo. 59 Open Level 1 . which are displayed as red. All elements are displayed in this view. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. regardless of phase. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 57 In the Project Browser. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 61 On the View Control Bar. and existing shows as half-tone. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. The renovated building model plan is displayed.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. new is shown in blue. right-click Level 1 . 62 If necessary.New.

and double-click Level 1 . and click OK. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. expand Views (all). NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial.Existing.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. click Project Units. you can see the new walls added to the building model. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and new construction. If you wish to do so. sizes. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.rvt. demolition.New. In this exercise. click Training Files. you can do so at this time. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. 2 Open Level 1 . therefore. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. expand Floor Plans. If you wish to save this file. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. In this view. You can also see that the room quantities. In this view. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Notice that this view is the original building model. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. 3 Open Level 1 . As the renovation process continues.Demo. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. define the units. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. go to the Settings menu. All room boundaries are phase-specific. 63 Close the file. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. the rooms change in both definition and size. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

10 Open Level 1 .New.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 13 Open Level 1 . and maximize the view. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. click Room Tag. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. In the Phasing dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. Use the following illustration as a guide.Demo. yet they have different room numbers. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 5 Click OK. click in each room as you move to the right. 6 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.Existing.

20 Close the file.15 Using the following illustration as a guide.Existing. View phase-specific room schedules. click Tile. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. 16 In the Project Browser. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 19 On the Window menu. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. and double-click Room Schedule . The two schedule views tile. expand Schedules/Quantities. 18 Open Room Schedule . notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. 17 On the Window menu. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in.New Construction. In addition. In this exercise. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. click Close Hidden Windows. In this case.

and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. You position the building models on the site plan. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. performance. modify their visibility. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In the final lesson. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.

One building model is a condominium. You position the building models on the site.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link two building models to the project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . and the other is a townhouse. modify their visibility. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.Linking Building Models In this lesson.

this system is not exposed to the user. you can do so. click Open.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Manual . 8 Clear Read-only. in the Model Linking folder that you created.rvt. c_Condo_Complex. and click Properties. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. this option will place the link at a predefined location. 2 On the File menu. 5 On the File menu. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. RELATED See the lesson. c_Townhouse. All three files now reside. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . click Training Files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This option is grayed out. 4 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Auto . and click OK. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Click Open. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. with write permission. click Close. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. click Save As. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Select c_Site. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. Otherwise. ■ ■ Manual .■ Auto . and save the file there. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. right-click.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. and open Common\c_Site. however. select the three files. click Open. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.

10 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Open. 11 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. select Auto . you can go to the Settings menu. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. expand Floor Plans.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. Notice the blue detail lines. and make your changes. expand Views (all). click Project Units. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. and double-click Level 1. If you wish to do so.

Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.rvt displays in the Type Selector.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 17 For the move endpoint. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. After you select it. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 16 For the move start point. The Move command requires two clicks. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 15 On the Edit toolbar. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The linked model moves as one object. The first click specifies the move start point. click (Move).

and select c_Townhouse.Origin to Origin. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. For Positioning. select Auto . Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.After you specify the location to move to. 21 Click Open. 18 On the View menu. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.

24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. To rotate an object. and click to specify the end of the rotation. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. you first specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . when the vertical line displays. 23 On the Edit toolbar.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. In this case.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy). select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The Copy command works much like the Move command. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.

under Identity data. click (Default 3D View). if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and click OK. 32 On the Edit menu.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . for Name. click . enter Townhouse A. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click Rotate. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. 34 On the Options Bar.

you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you need this project file open and in this view. click (SteeringWheels). they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. In this exercise. When you originally linked the files. 2 On the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. After linking the files. In this exercise. click and hold Orbit. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. click Save. you modify the elevation of the townhouses.38 On the File menu.

and click to select it. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Project Browser. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. Click the Revit Links tab. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and then select the plane that you want to align. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. under Views (all). This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. you first select the plane you want to align to. expand Elevations. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. When using the Align command.rvt. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click to select the line. and double-click South. 7 On the Tools toolbar. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. In this case. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. To do this. and click OK. when it highlights. In the steps that follow. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. click (Align).

click Save. double-click North. 15 On the File menu. under Elevations. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. click and hold Orbit. (SteeringWheels). Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click 13 On the View toolbar. 11 Return to the South elevation view. 12 On the View toolbar. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 9 In the Project Browser. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click (Default 3D View). Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . This would over-constrain the model. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. As you can see. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 4 Under Visibility. under Elevations. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. or Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom. you need this project file open and in this view. click By Host View.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the View menu. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 9 Under Visibility. If you have not completed the previous exercise. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. you can independently control the visibility settings. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View.rvt. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. By linked view. detail level. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you link a file. double-click South. display settings. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. and the halftone settings for each linked project. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. click Visibility/Graphics. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. click Custom. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. select <Custom>. In this exercise. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. In the next exercise. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. do so before continuing. 8 For Annotation Categories. 10 Click OK. expand c_Townhouse. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. click OK. scroll down and clear Levels.

By selecting custom under Model Categories. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. under Floor Plans. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. double-click Level 1.rvt. 14 On the View menu. select Custom. By default. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. 24 Click OK. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. or fine. Using the Custom option. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. select <Custom>. click Visibility/Graphics. medium.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click the Revit Links tab. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. on the Basics tab. click By Host View. expand c_Townhouse. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. 20 For c_Townhouse. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. You can click the value for Detail Level. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. With linked files. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. under Display Settings. and then set the detail level to coarse. no detail level changes are required.rvt. In this case. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 23 In the Model categories list.

and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. click Custom for the Townhouse link.rvt. all new. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. By default. In the next exercise. click OK. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. click Save. 28 Select By linked view for View range. you need this project file open and in this view. phase.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. All other components are grayed out. In this case. 26 Under Display Settings. In this exercise. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. existing. In most cases. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. 31 On the File menu. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. you manage the linked files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select c_Townhouse. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. With the Show All filter applied. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. on a sloped site for instance. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. under Visibility. However. 29 Click OK. 25 On the Revit Links tab. In this case. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. demolished. and phase filter of a specific link. there are situations. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. this is preferable. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . 3 Under Path Type. 4 Under Linked File. click the Revit tab. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 6 At the confirmation prompt. click Manage Links. 5 Click Unload.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.rvt. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. Locations Not Saved. click Yes. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. do so before continuing. select c_Condo_Complex. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. You learn more about this in the next lesson. and Saved Path fields are read only. In general. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. the link is maintained. Notice the Loaded. They supply information regarding the links. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 7 Click OK. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. In a shared coordinate environment. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory.

You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. 9 On the File menu. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. expand Revit Links. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. To do this. click the arrow next to the Open button. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. If you choose not to open that workset. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt. In these cases. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. However. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. and select Specify. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. the link is not loaded. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. right-click c_Condo_Complex.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. When you initially place the link. click Save As. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens.

When Revit project views are exported to DWG. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. leave the project file open in its current view. and save it as an RVT file. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you are establishing a shared origin point. In essence. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When you share coordinates between projects. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. When used in conjunction with model linking. name the file Site_Project. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . and the resulting project files. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models.10 In the Save As dialog. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. do so before continuing. In the next lesson. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. and the resulting project files. As indicated in the Status Bar. click the Condo Complex. 2 On the Tools menu. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. If you have closed the project.coordinates are used. In this case. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. open it before continuing. click Open. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. If you have not completed the lesson. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. When you are working in the host project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt and click Open. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. Linking Building Models on page 772. Select Site_Project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. do so before continuing. 3 In the drawing area.

5 On the Design Bar. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . even though both models originate from one linked file. Lot B. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. it is placed at a specific location. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. On the Status Bar. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. If you have not completed the exercise. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. when the edges highlight. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. you need this project file open and in this view. select Location 1.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. click to select it. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. In this exercise. do so before continuing. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. However. and Lot C. These three locations can be named Lot A. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. and click OK.

9 In the Select Location dialog. click . When constraining a link to a location. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Under Value. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Rename. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. In the Choose Location dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. select Move instance to. This is a one-time operation. and click OK. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click Reconcile. click OK. Record the current position as a location. enter Lot A for New. and click OK. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Change. click Not Shared for Shared Location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. under Instance Parameters. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 7 In the Rename dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.2 On the Options Bar. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 12 On the Options Bar. .

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. This is a two-click process. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. Notice the OK button is still not active. Save locations 21 On the File menu. click Duplicate. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. enter Lot B for Name. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 19 In the Select Location dialog. 16 Click Change. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. select the second option. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. select Save. ignore the warning. When you release the mouse button. To explicitly save a location.Notice the OK button is not active. When you create a location. you cannot redefine its location. and the left townhouse resides at that location. click the Revit tab. and click OK. or cancel the action. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and then select the townhouse project. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click OK. click OK. By relocating a project. Record current position as. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. and click OK. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. and click OK. the active location position is moved. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. When you relocate a project. The first click specifies the move start point. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. make sure Lot B is selected. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 26 Click OK. click Manage Links. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. a warning displays. Because Lot A is currently in use. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 23 Click Save Locations. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 30 On the Tools menu.

You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu. In this exercise.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. you work in one of the linked projects. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. NOTE In the following exercise. select Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 36 On the File menu. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. click Close. click Save.

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. double-click 1st Floor. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. under Floor Plans. In this exercise.By Shared Coordinates. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. if other models were linked into the same host. The current active location is Lot A. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the File menu. select Auto . This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. it is placed automatically within the host project. In addition. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Because this building model only has one named location. click Open.rvt file. Select c_Condo_Complex.rvt file. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Also. Click Open. If you have not completed the exercises.

select True North for Orientation. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. orient a view to true north. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In this exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. click Manage Place and Locations. enter Lot C. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. do so before continuing. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. you create a new location. under Graphics. click View Properties. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. and click OK. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. 6 Select Lot B. click Duplicate. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. and click Make Current. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 7 Click OK. you can select Lot C if necessary. you manage the shared locations. click Manage Place and Locations. 3 In the Name dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click OK. In the next exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the host file.

In this exercise. If you have not completed the exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Close. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. do so before continuing.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open. 10 On the File menu. On the Options Bar. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You can save the file if you wish.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Doors. and click OK. under Category. click the Fields tab. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. select Count. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

right-click Door Schedule. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.8 Click OK. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. select Family and Type for Sort by. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. In this exercise. click Save. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 14 On the File menu. and click Properties. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . 13 On the File menu. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 12 Select Grand totals. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. You have completed this tutorial. click Close. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. and then click OK twice. expand Schedules/Quantities.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and your username when using worksets. 6 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. and set it as your default template. These settings control the graphics. you create an office template. 10 In the Options dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Browse. select Invert background color.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 803 . which is independent of the project settings. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. and click OK. 8 In the New Project dialog. they are not saved to project files or template files.rte. 11 Under Colors. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click the Graphics tab. notification preferences. 3 In the Options dialog. In the second lesson. click the value for Selection color. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. Finally. 4 Under Colors. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click the Graphics tab. you modify the system environment. under Template file. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. journal cleanup options. selection default options. In the first lesson. click Training Files. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. click OK.

and open Metric\m_Settings. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. For Tooltip assistance. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. select red. select yellow. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. However. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. select One hour. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click the General tab. click the Graphics tab.rvt. click Modify. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. For Selection color. 15 Click OK.12 In the Color dialog. and select the wall. click No. and click OK. 14 Under Notifications. click Wall. clear Invert background color. click Training Files. 22 When prompted to save changes. select None. the elements causing the error display using this color.

and family libraries. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you specify default file locations. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. 4 Click Cancel. 7 In the Options dialog. and click Open. 5 Under Default path for user files. Under Username. select your preferred Save reminder interval. Under Journal File Cleanup. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 8 Click Cancel. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Your login name displays by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. including your default project template. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. do not save the changes. Specifying File Locations on page 805. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Default template file. click Places. select Normal. click Browse. centralized. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 2 In the Options dialog. TIP To view a template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. click Browse. click the File Locations tab. notice the list of library names. select the folder to save your files to by default. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. These files are used in the software support process. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. and click Browse to select a template. under Default path for family template files. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. such as in a large. you can start a new project with that template. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. For Tooltip assistance. This path is set automatically during the installation process. If prompted. However. family template files. 10 In the Places dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days).27 Click the General tab. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse.

13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library.library names and path. When you are opening. or loading a Revit Architecture file. and Import dialogs. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Load. and click Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration. under Libraries. and select it as the library path. 11 In the Places dialog. and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. saving. click (Add Value). that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or families. templates. Save. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click the icon side of the field. TIP You may want to create a new folder first.

24 Click 25 Click OK. If you work in a large office. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 23 Select My Library. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. custom color files. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 2 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Settings. 22 Click Places. 21 Click the File Locations tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. scroll down the list of building industry terms. click the Spelling tab. and Import dialogs. view the current path. 9 In the text editor. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. click My Library. 28 Click OK. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. specify the new location here. click Edit. and decal image files. Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Load. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click the My Library icon. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 19 Click Cancel. 5 In the text editor. (Remove Value) to delete the library. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. such as bump maps.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 15 Under Library Name. This path is determined during installation. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and click OK twice. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit.

you modify snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. work with snapping turned off. click OK. click OK. do not save the changes. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Text. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Browse. click default template. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit. 23 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 4 In the New Project dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 In the text editor. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click OK. click the Spelling tab. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.rte. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808.11 In the Options dialog. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Training Files. You can turn snap settings on and off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. delete sheetmtl-CU. 19 Under Settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. If prompted. click Modify. In this exercise. 14 Click in the drawing area. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Restore Defaults. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 22 In the text editor. 12 On the Standard toolbar. under Template file.

TIP To zoom while sketching. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.6 Under Dimension Snaps. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. clear Chain. use the wheel button on your mouse. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click OK. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . enter SM. and enter 500 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 10 On the Options Bar. zoom out until it does so. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. snapping reverts to the system default settings. While sketching. 7 Under Object Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. such as ZO to zoom out. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and move the cursor to the right.. click Wall.

and move the cursor to the right. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and the wall edges.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. and do not save the file. and specify the wall endpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that snapping is once again active. it will snap to the endpoints. click Modify. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Move the cursor downward. and click Wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. If you move the cursor along the wall.. Do not set the wall end point. and delete the value 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 18 Enter SM. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. This is the increment that you added previously. 24 Click OK. the command is only active for one click of the mouse.

Finally. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. lines. click Training Files. you render a region to observe the changes. In the steps that follow. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and object styles. fill patterns. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face.rvt. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and open Metric\m_Settings. You create and modify materials. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. When you apply a material to an element. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. annotations. save the project file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Using these options.

Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 10 Click the Graphics tab. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. The Render Appearance Library is a local. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . The properties describe the color. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and texture of the material. 2 Scroll down the materials list. this material provides a starting point for the new material. Masonry . 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.Fieldstone material. However. scale. When a model element is loaded into a project. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.Fieldstone. and select Masonry . These details will display in rendered images. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 3 Click (Duplicate). This list includes all materials available for use on model elements.Fieldstone. 9 Click Apply. and click OK. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. In the Materials dialog. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.Stone. 6 Click Replace. In the next exercise. and double-click 02 Entry Level. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and click OK. 11 Click OK. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Stone. When you change properties of a render appearance. for Class. and click (Element Properties). read-only library for render appearances. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. enter Masonry . In the steps that follow. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser.

18 For Finish 1. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . and click OK. select Masonry . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. click in the Material field. 16 Enter the new wall name. 23 While pressing CTRL. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 17 For Structure.Fieldstone.14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. Fieldstone on CMU. select the rear exterior wall. 21 Click OK three times. click This is the material that you created. 25 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 20 In the Materials dialog. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 15 Click Duplicate. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 24 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style.Fieldstone. click Edit. 26 On the View Control Bar.Brick. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click Edit/New.

This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. click Render. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. select the render region (a red rectangle). select Low or Medium. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. When finished. select Region.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. for Setting. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. and click Rendering. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. under Quality. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. The rendering process begins. In the following exercise. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 29 In the 3D view. click Rendering Dialog. right-click the Design Bar.

rvt.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Drafting pattern density is fixed. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Zoom into the model. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. click Show the model. choose Model. 7 Under Custom. select Custom. expand Elevations. and clear Region. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. click Import. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. m_Settings-in progress. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Then click Render again. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 Under Pattern Type. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. in the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. such as steel. 5 Click New. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. and double-click West. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

(Element Properties). and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. 22 Click OK three times. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select fldstn. select Model. 18 Under Surface Pattern. for Finish 1. click OK. click Modify. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. enter Fieldstone. enter . 17 On the right side of the Materials field.Fieldstone material. under Pattern Type. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click Edit. 9 Under Custom. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. click in the Material field.Fieldstone. and for Import scale. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click Edit/New. In the Materials dialog. click 15 For Structure.pat. 10 For Name. 11 Click OK. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click . click to select a fill pattern. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.56. 21 In the Materials dialog.

27 Proceed to the next exercise. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). click (Default 3D View).25 On the View toolbar. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand 3D Views.rvt. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP If the pattern does not display. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. m_Settings-in progress. there are often multiple window types within a project. 2 On the keyboard. For example. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. and double-click 3 Windows. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings.

click in the Value column. . 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.3 On the View Control Bar. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. 14 In the Materials dialog. 10 Select the arched window. click By Category (located under the materials list). and click . click (Element Properties). for Trim Exterior Material. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. for Trim Exterior Material. click By Category. click (Element Properties). Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 5 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 9 Click OK twice. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. and click 15 Click OK twice.

and click OK. expand Windows. 18 On the Model Objects tab. click OK. click OK. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Name. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 23 Click Replace. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. enter Trim . descriptions.red paint. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 29 In the Materials dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. type red. select Paint. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. click in the Material column. 19 For Trim.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Class. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . and select Trim. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 25 In the search field. select Trim. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. . When you render a 3D view. or keywords include the word red. (Duplicate). 28 Under Shading. and click OK. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance.

for Name. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click New. 11 For Line Pattern. select Roofs. m_Settings-in progress. select Roof Line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. is open with the 3D view active. 10 For Line Color. (Default 3D view). m_Settings-in progress.rvt. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.31 On the View toolbar. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter Roof Line. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. select Red.rvt. Now that you have created a line pattern. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. under Category.

double-click to Building. Notice that the line color displays in this view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views.12 Click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. but not the line pattern. 13 In the Project Browser. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. The line style is applied to the roof in the view.

for Visibility. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 In the Project Browser. select Black. select Solid. under Category. 20 Click OK. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. select Blue. under Floor Plans. double-click 03 Roof. elevations. click Override. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. Plans. sections. select Roofs. For Color. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. For Pattern. 19 For Line Pattern. select Roofs.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Roof Line. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 18 For Line Color. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select 5.

29 For Name. select Double dash. select Zoning Setback. This places the line above the topography. double-click Site. 34 On the Options Bar. select Red. under Modify Subcategories.25 Click OK twice. select Level: 02 Entry Level. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . For Line Pattern. click New. (Line). For Line Color. enter Zoning Setback. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click Click (Draw). under Floor Plans. 33 In the Type Selector. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select 2. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 31 Click OK. and click OK. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the site topography and the property lines. click Lines. specify the following: ■ For Plane.

under Floor Plans. Modifying Annotations on page 825. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 40 In the Project Browser. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Lines. and clear Property Lines. and then clear Property Lines. Expand Site. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the View toolbar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. double-click 02 Entry Level. NOTE If Site is not selected. select it. click (Default 3D View). (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. 39 Click OK. 43 Click OK. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 36 On the View toolbar.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. and clear Zoning Setback. 38 On the Model Categories tab.

you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings.rvt. 9 In the Type Selector. 4 Enter the name Linear . You have created a new dimension style. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. Modifying Annotations | 825 . To place a dimension. click the default value. double-click 02 Entry Level. click Dimension.rvt. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Imperial and click OK. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select Linear . 7 Click OK twice. m_Settings-in progress. and place a dimension on the floor plan. for Units Format. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. For Units. m_Settings-in progress.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click one wall. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Imperial. and then click outside the second wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. (Undo). select Feet and fractional inches. click another wall. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click Duplicate. 5 Under Text. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

click Tag ➤ By Category. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . A window instance tag displays on the selected window. click Tag All Not Tagged. Leave M_Window Tag .Number as the assigned tag. In the preview image. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.Number. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click M_Window Tag . In the steps that follow. clear Leader. select the 3 window tags. 26 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark.14 On the Options Bar. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 16 Click Cancel. 23 Click OK. Then press Delete. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. notice that the label displays 1i. 18 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the Tags dialog. 19 Click Load.Number.rfa. scroll down to Windows. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 28 On the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL.Number is now the assigned tag. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 27 On the west wall. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. click the bottom window. click (Element Properties). The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. under Category.

Unless overridden. select 0 decimal places. Unless overridden. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. for Rounding. select Faces. notice Window Tags appears twice. 31 On the Design Bar.Number. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. select meters squared. and click OK. In the second section.rvt. for Area. M_Window Tag . 3 In the Format dialog. dimensions use these project settings. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. For Unit symbol. In the final section. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values.Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. 8 Under Walls. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click the default value. select Openings. for Length. select To the nearest 100. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 4 In the Project Units dialog. (Default 3D View). Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. 2 In the Project Units dialog. In the first section. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 32 On the View toolbar. Specifying Units of Measurement. 6 Click OK. the other displays the instance value. verify that Create is clear. click Modify. 30 Under Leader. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the detail level assignments. and click OK. Click OK. and Detail Level Options | 827 . dimension values display using this setting. 9 Under Doors and Windows. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.Under Category. you specify the project units of measurements. click the default value.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and expand 3D Views. click Training Files. In this exercise. In this table. click .In this project. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. expand Floor Plans. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In the left pane of the Open dialog. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK. You do not select a view scale to move it. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 10 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 2 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 .Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. In the Project Browser. and click OK.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. and click Apply. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 8 Select Phase. and click OK. expand each view type. 5 On the Views tab. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand Sheets (all).Phase 2-Structure West Wing . select Discipline.

13 Select Sheet Prefix.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. click the Folders tab. 16 Click the Views tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. under Sheets. and click New. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. expand each sheet set. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

Creating an Office Template on page 831. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. If you want to save this file. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. enter a unique file name. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. and click OK. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. You can also save these settings in a template file. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. under Views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Whenever you create a new project or template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte template. expand Complete. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and Discipline. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. the same rules apply. For example. when you create a new project. and view names. Proceed to the next lesson. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. click Browse. View Type (Family and Type). 21 In the Project Browser. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. In that case. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. levels. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you select the starting point for your office template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you create an office template. Creating an Office Template | 831 .20 In the Browser Organization dialog. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. In this lesson. and click OK. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. and expand both Architectural and Structural. When you create new projects. In the lesson that follows. dimensions styles. expand 3D Views. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. navigate to your preferred directory. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. 2 Under Template file. and click Open. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. When you create a new template based on an existing template. and open Metric\Templates. You can choose from several templates.

15 Under Create new. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click Browse. If you have additional projects open. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. When you create the material. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. weights. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. In this exercise. in the drawing area. 14 Click Open. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. and double-click North. close them. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you modify the project settings for your new template. 13 Select the default template. If you want to use a template other than the default. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 7 In the Project Browser. for Create new. 6 Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 12 Under Template File. select Project. you can select it now.5 In the New Project dialog. select Project template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.

you can set line weights. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 13 If necessary. or refer to the online help. You do this by defining the render appearance. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. TIP For more information about creating new materials. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. transparency. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. For more details on modifying these settings. or modify existing patterns. line colors. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and materials for model objects. 4 Click Replace. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . In the Object Styles dialog. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and move model patterns. and imported objects. the changes are saved as part of the project template. create and modify them as needed. specific modifications are not dictated. Modifying System Settings on page 803. including color. You can align. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. If you change render appearance properties. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 2 Scroll down the materials list. or refer to the online help. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Observe the materials that are already defined. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. see a preview of the rendered material. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. For more information. annotation objects. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 9 Click OK when finished. rotate. see the previous lesson. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. create new subcategories. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. When you create or modify a material. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. texture. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. and change render appearance properties.During this exercise. line patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and similar attributes.

You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 34 Click OK. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog.15 Modify categories. 18 For existing line categories. 19 If necessary. modify the line weight. 29 Click OK. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select it from this list. create new line subcategories. click Duplicate. To see the details of a particular style. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. such as section lines and dimension lines. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. tags. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. or line pattern as needed. 20 Click OK. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and dimensions. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and create new subcategories as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. name the style. and specify the properties. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. select it. You can add and delete view scales. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. line color. and click Edit. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 32 To modify a line pattern.

56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area.40 Click OK. and radial dimensions are modified separately. click Load. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 62 Click OK. click Format. select it from this list. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. and Angle settings. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 46 Click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. and choose a decimal symbol. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. 53 For Length. 57 Specify the Slope option. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. TIP In the drawing area. 60 Under Walls. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Volume. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 55 Click OK. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. name the style. For example. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. In the Tags dialog. click Duplicate. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. and specify the properties. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 50 To load new annotation tags. angular. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 58 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Linear. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. To see the details of a particular style. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary.

69 If necessary. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. rename. rename. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 70 Click the Sheets tab. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 72 If necessary. click the arrows between columns. or edit existing organization types. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 64 Review the table. Using the arrows between the columns. In such a case. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Links to associated tutorials are provided. click the Views tab. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. For example. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Although these settings can be saved within a template. create new browser organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. See Setting up If necessary. Use the table below as a checklist. 65 Click OK. or Fine. Medium. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. You can find additional information in Help. 68 Delete. When you create a new view. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 71 Delete. To move the view scales. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. The detail level is based on view scale.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. and move view scales as needed. In a typical project. However. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. or edit existing organization types. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. create new browser organization types. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 73 Click OK.

Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. click Door. or use the Project Browser. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. you can move onto the next component type. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. 2 In the Type Selector. Depending on the intended use of this template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. and the poche depth. modify. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. In addition. you may want to delete. You can load any family or group into a template. In the steps that follow. Although the options are endless. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. there are some important thoughts to consider. furniture. and electrical fixtures. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you do both. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. If you have not completed the previous exercise. or electrical fixtures. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. if you load every available window type. phase filters. If necessary. do so before starting this exercise.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. the section cut material. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you could load detail components. Although this is possible. However. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. or add to this selection. title blocks. If this selection is satisfactory. you can set up the phases. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. For example. notice the list of doors already loaded. For example. you can set the default contour line interval. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.

Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Load. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. or modify a door. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Bar. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Enter a name. In the Element Properties dialog. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Click Duplicate. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Select it. create. Notice that each family category is listed.3 To modify. Make modifications. click Edit/New. Modify type properties. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. expand Families. click Edit/New. or load a new door type. In the Element Properties dialog. create. and click Open. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template.

In this exercise. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. To load a title block. 11 On the Options Bar. load. you created new projects using different templates. Discipline. In addition. To do so. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. This title block is currently part of the template. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. click Load. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and click Delete. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click 12 Click Preview. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. (Element Properties). create. In addition. and select the title block type.) 10 Expand the title block. you create the views required for your template. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. right-click the component. View Range. 13 Click OK. Detail Level. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command.

Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 6 Click OK. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 11 Click Apply. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. In this exercise. open the view from the Project Browser. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. you can apply a view template to any view. 2 Under Names. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. select Architectural Plan. under Floor Plans. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser.settings of categories and subcategories. under Floor Plans. After applying the template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. and then click OK. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. In addition. click Apply. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. double-click Site. double-click Level 2. At any time. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 15 In the Project Browser. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 4 If necessary. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and apply the appropriate template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. under Elevations. double-click South. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. select Site Plan. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. you will first modify view templates. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and click OK. click Apply. 12 In the Project Browser. Every time a new plan view is created. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action.

■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. under 3D Views. To orient the 3D view to another view. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. notice that you have the option to rename. 22 In the Project Browser. and. 30 In the Project Browser. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. or delete this view. Rename. or delete them as needed. in the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. Black level heads have no associated views. 31 Rename the 3D View. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. right-click Level 1. right-click the ViewCube. select Make Plan View. and click Properties.Notice the level names. review the existing floor plans. and click Save View. (Default 3D View). If you want to modify view properties. click Schedule/Quantities. or an edge of the ViewCube. click Orient to a Direction. ceiling plans. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. click Orient to View. duplicate. If it does not display. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Create additional levels as needed. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. right-click {3D}. click Level. review the floor plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. By default. duplicate. and elevations. Blue level heads have associated plan views. 20 In the Project Browser. If prompted. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 23 To add more levels to the template. in the shortcut menu. To orient the 3D view to a direction. under Floor Plans. right-click the ViewCube. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. right-click the ViewCube. and select the desired view. and click Rename. use the ViewCube. and select the desired direction. enter a view name. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click the view name. expand 3D Views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . 21 In the Project Browser. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. a face. under Floor Plans.

click Sheet. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. 42 Create new sheets as needed. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. select and order required fields. select the title block and delete it. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. in the Project Browser. To do so. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. select one. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Select a view. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. click Add View. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. To later add a title block to a sheet. After the sheet is created. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. 40 To add views to the sheet. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the default title block. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. modify settings as needed. Right-click the sheet name.txt for MicroStation).txt for AutoCAD. 37 Click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click Rename. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. or exportlayersdgn. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. On the Appearance tab.You can add schedules to a template. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. modify settings as needed. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. On the Formatting tab. and click Add View to Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and modify their properties accordingly. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. on the View tab of the Design Bar. You can still add views to the sheet. and click OK. You are prompted to select a title block. and click OK. On the Filter tab. select the category type. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. When you import a DWG or DXF file. assign filters. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). modify settings as needed.

specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and related multi-category tags and schedules. name the file. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. windows. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. project parameters. for example. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. name the file. 9 Click Save As. and click Save. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Using shared parameters. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. 2 For each category. They cannot be shared with other projects. doors. When you create a multi-category schedule.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. When scheduling. and so on. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. click Save As. 8 In the dialog. You can save these mappings to a text file. therefore. For example. and so on. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. 5 For each category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . These settings are retained within the project template. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. select Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and click Save. and click Save. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. name the file. and they become the set mappings for the project. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.

844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select a parameter discipline type. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 5 Enter the group name. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK. 9 Name the parameter. for Name. 14 Click Add. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you may want to save the file to a network location. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. click New. add required parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. you can create a list of parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. 24 To add a shared project parameter. click Add. 17 Under Discipline. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 3 Name and save the file. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 10 Click OK. under Groups. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 19 Under Group parameter under. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. click New. 16 Under Parameter Data. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and select Shared Parameter. select a parameter value type.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 25 Click Select. project parameters. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 26 Click OK. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 21 Under Categories. enter a parameter name. select Project parameter. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and click OK. 2 Click Create. 8 Under Parameters. 11 For each parameter group. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. If a file already exists. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. select a group to add parameters to. and choose a shared parameter. For each parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and specify its discipline and type. 18 Under Type of Parameter.

27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. Click OK. and print. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. and click Open. and make it your default template file. click OK. In this exercise. make minor modifications if necessary. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Schedule/Quantities. or refer to the online help. 34 For Category. for Name. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 32 Navigate to the directory. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and the percent of actual size. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. and click OK. 35 For Name. For information on creating multi-category tags. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. select Multi-Category. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. select the tag. paper placement. you can load them into the template. 6 In the New dialog. By creating named settings within the template. By going first to the Print command. 37 When you have completed the schedule. The tag is now part of the template. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 28 Click OK. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. enter a name for the schedule. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. save the file as a template. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. For each printer. you need only select a setting. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. you create named print settings. 4 Modify the printer settings. 2 Under Printer. click Setup. 5 Click Save As. 3 Under Settings.

click Setup. 20 Click OK. and click Open. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Create additional settings as needed. and create new settings for this printer. click Save as. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. By investing the time to individualize your template. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. select Template Files (*. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. In addition. and click Open. The only remaining task is to save it.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. click Browse. In addition. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. If you need to share this file with others. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and click Save. select it. 15 Name the template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Under Save as type. 19 Select the template. 23 For Default template file. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also set this template as your default template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 9 In the Print dialog. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 25 Click OK. select a different printer. and click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer.rte). 18 Click Browse. 11 Click Close when finished. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Your template is complete. 24 Navigate to the template location. modify the printer settings. In this lesson. save it in a network location. If you have a project. you modified settings. and saved them to a template. enter a new name for the printer. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. loaded components. 22 Click the File Locations tab. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful